JP2017124298A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To enhance interest in a game by allowing an execution opportunity of a special performance to be watched.SOLUTION: When a special performance is executed and control is performed to a specific game state, control is performed to a special performance state at a ratio higher than when control is performed to the specific game state without executing the special performance (for example, an execution ratio of a read-ahead notice performance is higher in a "probability variable jackpot" than in a "normal jackpot"). The special performance is executable in variation display executed based on the fact that variable winning means (for example, a variable winning ball device 15) is in an advantageous state (for example, a long open state for 5.8 seconds) and game balls pass through a start area (for example, a second start winning hole 14).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 57

Description

  According to the present invention, a variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable and deriving and displaying a display result based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the starting area provided in the game area is predetermined. The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the displayed specific display result is derived and displayed.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display device becomes a specific display result, a predetermined game value Are configured to give the player.

  The game value is the right that the state of the special variable winning ball device provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine is advantageous for a player who is easy to win, and the right for becoming advantageous for a player. Or a condition where a condition for paying out a winning ball is easily established.

  In the pachinko gaming machine, when a specific display result is derived and displayed, it is controlled to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state). Note that the derivation display is to finally stop and display the identification information (symbol). In the specific gaming state, the special variable winning device (large winning opening) is opened a predetermined number of times so that the game ball can easily win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. Hereinafter, the period during which each special winning opening is open may be referred to as a round.

  In such a gaming machine, when the gaming state is a high-probability short-time state, the special effect state (special sound mode) is controlled and even in the normal state, a special effect (special sound) having the same form as the special effect state There is one that is configured to be capable of executing a voice mode similar to the mode (see Patent Document 1). In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when the special effect is executed in the normal state, the high probability time-short state is set at a higher rate than when the special effect is not executed, and the special effect state is controlled. .

JP2013-34607A (paragraphs 1129-1130)

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, when the special effect is executed, the special effect state is controlled at a high rate, so it can be noted whether or not the special effect is executed. However, no consideration is given to the execution trigger of the special effect, and the player cannot be focused on the execution trigger of the special effect.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can focus attention on the execution opportunity of special effects and can improve the interest of the game.

(Means 1) In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a game medium (for example, a game ball) has passed through a starting area (for example, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14) provided in the gaming area. Based on this, variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display 8a) that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol) that can be identified and derives and displays the display result. , A gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state (for example, jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player when a predetermined display result (for example, jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b) The variable winning means (for example, variable winning ball apparatus 15) that can be changed between an advantageous state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium easily passes through the starting area and a disadvantageous state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium is difficult to pass. , A special performance state (for example, red) corresponding to a high probability / high base state corresponding to a special gaming state (for example, high probability / high base state) advantageous to the player after the end of the specific gaming state Effect state control means (for example, steps S640, S643, S646, and S649 in the effect control microcomputer 100 are executed). Portion) and special effects (for example, background effects) similar to the special effects state can be executed when not controlled to the special effects state (for example, when controlled to the low probability / low base state). Special effect execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps S8005 to S8016 in the effect control microcomputer 100). When the special effect is executed by the special effect executing means and controlled to the specific game state, the effect state control means is higher in proportion than the case where the special effect is controlled without being executed. It is controlled to a special effect state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 59, a prefetch notice effect and a background effect are executed at a higher rate in the case of a promiscuous big hit than in the case of a normal big win). The effect execution means can execute a special effect in variable display of identification information executed based on the fact that the variable winning means is in an advantageous state and the game medium passes through the starting area (for example, an effect control microcomputer 100 is executed in steps S8011, S8012 when N is determined in step S8009 and N is determined in step S8010. And the special effect can be executed in the variable display executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second start winning port 14 in a long-term open state for 5.8 seconds). With such a configuration, attention can be paid to the execution opportunity of the special effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Means 2) In the means 1, when the variable winning means is in an advantageous state in the normal state, notifying means for notifying that the variable winning means is in an advantageous state (for example, step S779 in the production control microcomputer 100, A portion for executing S780, S734 to S737) and demonstration effect execution means for executing a predetermined demonstration effect when the period during which the variable display of the identification information is not performed exceeds a predetermined period (for example, the microcomputer 100 for effect control) Part for executing step S669 in FIG. 5) and notification limiting means for limiting notification by the notification means after the demonstration effect execution means ends the predetermined demonstration effect (for example, N is determined in step S755 in the effect control microcomputer 100). When it is determined that Y in stepped S757, may be configured to include a portion) to end the process without shifting to step S759. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a notification that the game is being controlled in an advantageous state even though no game is being performed.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or 2, the reach effect executing means for executing the reach effect (for example, step S8036 in accordance with the process table selected in steps S8030 and S8034 in accordance with the setting in step S8027 in the effect control microcomputer 100) The portion for executing S851) and the reach effect executing means can execute the specific reach effect (for example, the reach effect of the specific reach mode) when the special effect state is controlled, and the special effect is executed. (E.g., the production control microcomputer 100 executes step S6505 in any one of steps S6502 to S6504 to enter the specific reach mode). Set up) Good. According to such a configuration, the special effect and the reach effect can be associated, and the effect of the special effect can be improved.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the start condition after the game medium (for example, a game ball) passes through the start area (for example, the first start winning port 13 or the second start winning port 14). (For example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed, and the big hit game is not executed) A game machine that performs variable display of identification information (for example, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the variation display of the production symbol) based on the game, and extracts numerical data when the game medium passes through the starting area. Numerical data extraction means (for example, the part in which the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S1215 and S1227) and the start condition even though the game medium has passed through the start area. For variable display of identification information that does not hold, the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means is reserved and stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) (for example, first reserved memory or second reserved memory). Storage means (for example, a first storage buffer or a second storage buffer) that can be stored as a storage, and a storage display means (for example, the second implementation) that displays the storage stored in the storage device as a storage display. And a pre-determining means (for example, for game control) for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display of the identification information is set as the specific display result based on the establishment of the start condition. The step of executing step S61 in the microcomputer 560) and the identification information based on the hold storage stored in the hold storage means before the determination by the predetermination means Specific determination means for determining whether or not the display result of the display is a specific display result (for example, a part for executing steps S220 and S222 in the game control microcomputer 560), Aspect (“◯” in the second embodiment: see FIG. 72 (A)) and a special aspect that is different from the normal aspect (six on the outside of “◯” in the second embodiment) A line is drawn (refer to FIG. 73 (B)), and a first special mode (“×” in “○” in the second embodiment) which is a mode different from the normal mode and the special mode. Included: refer to FIG. 72 (B1)) and the second special mode (contains two “x” in “◯” in the second embodiment: refer to FIG. 72 (B2)), specific determination Depending on the determination result of the means, the specific determination at a different rate On-hold notice effect execution means (for example, second display) capable of executing a hold notice effect (for example, a pre-read effect) for displaying the hold indication corresponding to the hold memory that is the target of the determination in the first special mode or the second special mode. A portion in which the production control microcomputer 100 in the embodiment executes steps S67106, S67114, S1813, and the like. 67 (B)), and the hold notice effect executing means displays the hold display at a plurality of timings (for example, start winning timing, arbitrary shift timing, other arbitrary timing, etc.) in the first special mode. Alternatively, it is possible to change to the second special mode and display the suggestion effect execution means for executing the suggestion effect indicating whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes (for example, in the second embodiment) The effect control microcomputer 100 further includes a portion for executing steps S671110, S67115, S1806, S1813, etc., and the suggestion effect execution means displays the hold display in a special mode when the hold display is displayed in a special mode. The suggestion effect is executed more frequently than when it is not performed (for example, the effect-control microcomputer 100 Moiety to perform the step S1806 and the like. FIG. 71 (A), may be configured as (B) refer). According to such a configuration, it is possible to display the hold display by changing to the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings. When the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the suggestion effect is executed at a high frequency, so that a sense of expectation can be enhanced and the game entertainment can be improved.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the start condition after the game medium (for example, a game ball) has passed through the start area (for example, the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14). (For example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed, and the big hit game is not executed) A game machine that performs variable display of identification information based on variable display of identification information (for example, variable display of a first special symbol, a second special symbol, and a production symbol) based on the game Numerical data extraction means (for example, the part in which the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S1215 and S1227) that extracts numerical data when the game passes, and the start area For variable display of identification information for which the start condition has not yet been established even though the body has passed, the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means is reserved and stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) (for example, , A hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer or a second hold storage buffer) that can be stored as a first hold memory or a second hold memory, and a hold memory stored in the hold storage means are displayed as a hold display. Whether or not to make the display result of the variable display of the identification information a specific display result based on the hold display means (for example, the summed hold storage display unit in the second embodiment) and the start condition being satisfied Predetermining means to be determined (for example, the part for executing step S61 in the game control microcomputer 560), and stored in the holding storage means before the determination of the predetermining means. Specific determination means for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display of the identification information based on the held storage becomes the specific display result (for example, a part for executing steps S220 and S222 in the game control microcomputer 560); The display mode of the hold display includes a normal mode (“◯” in the second embodiment: see FIG. 72A) and a special mode (second embodiment) that is different from the normal mode. In FIG. 73B, six lines are drawn outside “◯” in FIG. 73, and the first special mode (second embodiment) which is a mode different from the normal mode and the special mode. “X” is included in “◯” in FIG. 72: see FIG. 72 (B1)) and the second special mode (“○” in the second embodiment is included in two “X”: FIG. 72 ( B2))), and the determination of the specific determination means Depending on the result, it is possible to execute a hold notice effect (for example, a pre-read effect) that displays the hold display corresponding to the hold memory that has been determined by the specific determination means in different proportions in the first special mode or the second special mode. Holding notice effect execution means (for example, the part in which the effect control microcomputer 100 in the second embodiment executes steps S67106, S67114, S1813, etc.). 67 (B)), and a plurality of types of hold notice effect patterns are provided as the effect patterns of the hold notice effect. The hold display can be changed to the first special mode or the second special mode at a shift timing, other arbitrary timings, etc.), and the specific determination is performed when the specific determination means determines that the specific display result is obtained. The hold display corresponding to the hold memory that is the determination target of the specific determination means is displayed in a second special mode at a higher rate than when the means determines that the specific display result is not obtained (for example, in the second embodiment) The part in which the production control microcomputer 100 executes step S67106 and the like in the form (see FIG. 67 (B)). When the hold notice effect is performed in the hold notice effect pattern (for example, the second look-ahead effect pattern) displayed by changing to another form or the second special form, the first special form or the first notice is displayed without displaying the hold display in the special form. 2 The hold display is displayed in the second special mode at a higher rate than when the hold notice effect is displayed with the hold notice effect pattern (for example, the first prefetch effect pattern) displayed in the special mode (for example, the microcomputer for effect control). 100 is a part that executes steps S67106, S67107, etc. (See FIGS. 67B and 68). According to such a configuration, it is possible to display the hold display by changing to the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings. In addition, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the ratio displayed in the second special mode is high when the specific display result is displayed, so that the expectation is increased. Can improve the game entertainment.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, the start condition is satisfied after the game medium (for example, a game ball) passes through the start area (for example, the first start port 13 or the second start port 14). (For example, when the start winning memory number is not 0, neither the variable display of the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is executed, nor is it a big hit gaming state) A game machine that variably displays identification information (for example, the first special symbol or the second special symbol), and a normal variable display means (for example, a normal symbol display) that variably displays the normal identification information (for example, the normal symbol). 10) and normal identification information determining means (for example, a game control micro) for determining whether or not the display result of the normal identification information derived and displayed on the normal variable display means is a predetermined display result (for example, a winning symbol). A portion of the computer 560 that executes the process of step S400) and an advantageous state control means that controls the variable winning means to an advantageous state (for example, a winning game state) when a predetermined display result is derived to the ordinary variable display means. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 is advantageous in comparison with the normal state (for example, the low base state) based on the execution of the processing of steps S454 and S455 in the game control microcomputer 560 and the establishment of the predetermined condition. A game state control means for controlling to a special game state (for example, a high base state) whose frequency of state control is increased, and a display result of variable display of identification information when the game medium passes through the start area Numerical data extraction means (for example, a big hit determination random number) for extracting numerical data for determining whether or not to obtain a result (for example, a big hit determination random number) A predetermined upper limit for the variable display of the identification information for which the start condition is not yet satisfied even though the game medium has passed through the start area). A special effect execution is provided with a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer and a second hold storage buffer) for storing numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means as a hold storage up to a number (for example, 4). The means executes a special effect when the variable display of the identification information is performed based on the hold storage stored when the advantageous state is controlled in the normal state (for example, in the third embodiment, See steps S663 and S664 in FIG. 76, step S8003 in FIG. 78 (particularly in the case of “Y”), and S8004. ) When the variable display of the identification information based on the stored storage stored when the advantageous state is controlled in the special gaming state, the special effect is not executed (for example, in the third embodiment) 76, steps S661, S662, and step S8003 in FIG. 78 (especially in the case of “N”), the hold memory stored when the special game state is controlled to the advantageous state in the normal state is held. When the game medium passes through the starting area while being controlled in the advantageous state in the state stored in the storage means, and is controlled in the advantageous state in the special gaming state stored in the holding storage means The special effect is executed when the variable display of the identification information based on the stored hold is performed (for example, in the third embodiment, Step in 76 S663, S665, steps in FIG. 78 S8003 (especially in the case of "Y"), may be configured to S8004 reference) as. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the frequency of performing special effects from being insufficient and the interest in the game from decreasing.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the decoration design prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the symbol designation | designated command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the normal symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a gate switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol fluctuation | variation process. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of a normal symbol stop. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a winning time determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the command storage area at the time of a start winning prize. It is explanatory drawing which shows the random number which the microcomputer for production control uses. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the execution area of a predetermined effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a predetermined | prescribed effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a predetermined | prescribed effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a predetermined | prescribed effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example in case the predetermined | prescribed effect which alert | reports the alerting | reporting result of a loss is performed before alert | reporting that a reach effect is performed. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st predetermined | prescribed effect process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st predetermined | prescribed effect process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st predetermined | prescribed effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 1st predetermined | prescribed effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd predetermined production process. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 2nd predetermined | prescribed effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch notice determination processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows a prefetch notice effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows a background production | presentation determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows reach production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch effect determination process in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the prefetch effect execution determination table and final display mode determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the prefetch effect pattern determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the prefetch effect change timing determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect mode determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the prefetch effect based on the 1st prefetch effect pattern in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the prefetch effect based on the 2nd prefetch effect pattern in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the prefetch effect based on the 2nd prefetch effect pattern in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting port switch passage process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the command storage area | region at the time of a start winning prize in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration design change start process in 3rd Embodiment.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  A member forming the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 4 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape) at a predetermined position (for example, the central portion of the lower plate) on the upper surface, for example, on the upper surface, and is gripped by the player in a plurality of directions. A stick controller 122 that can be tilted is attached (front, rear, left, and right).

  The member that forms the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 can be operated by a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation, for example, by pressing down on a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 is configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a player's operation action performed on the push button 120 is provided inside the upper plate main body at the position where the push button 120 is installed. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are mounted in the vertical position in the center portion of the upper plate and the lower plate, but the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are maintained while maintaining the vertical position relationship. The attachment position of the stick controller 122 may be a position that is shifted to either the left or right in the upper plate and the lower plate. Further, the positional relationship between the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may be, for example, a horizontal positional relationship instead of the vertical direction.

  The trigger button 121 provided on the stick controller 122 is configured such that the player can perform an instruction operation by pushing and pulling with an operation finger while the player holds the operation rod 122A of the stick controller 122 with an operating hand. Yes. The push button 120 is provided at a predetermined position of the glass door frame 2 that forms an upper plate separately from the stick controller 122, and the player pushes the push button 120 with an operating hand even when the player does not hold the operation rod 122A of the stick controller 122. The instruction operation can be performed depending on the situation. Therefore, it is difficult for the trigger button 121 to be continuously operated as a continuous instruction operation compared to the push button 120.

  Further, the stick controller 122 incorporates a vibrator motor 126 for causing the stick controller 122 to vibrate. In this embodiment, for example, the vibration is generated by biasing the center of gravity of the shaft of the vibrator motor 126 or attaching a weight to the shaft, and controlling the rotation of the vibrator motor 126 by the effect control microcomputer 100 to thereby generate a stick controller. It is controlled so that 122 is vibrated.

  On the right side of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, on the right side of the effect display device 9 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 8a), a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information. Is also provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although the gaming machine of this embodiment includes two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b, the gaming machine may include only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14 after passing (including winning)), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display area, there is a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative symbols (for production) “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Synchronous means that the start time and end time of variable display are substantially the same (may be exactly the same) and the variable display period is substantially the same (may be exactly the same). In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, a decorative symbol that reminds the jackpot on the effect display device 9 The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the decorative display is changed as a liquid crystal display effect in the effect display device 9. In the effect display device 9, for example, an effect using a character image, a jackpot determination, and a change pattern determination are performed. An effect of displaying a notification image based on the result is also executed.

  Further, when the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started after the variable symbol display is started. There is a case where a predetermined combination of decorative symbols that do not become reach is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal shift”) variable display mode when the variable display result is an out-of-order design.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the decorative symbol variable display state starts after the variable symbol variable display is started. After reaching the reach state, the reach effect is executed, and a predetermined combination of decorative symbols that does not eventually become a big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the decorative symbols are all stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas of the effect display device 9.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory) is displayed 4. A second special symbol storage memory display 18b comprising two displays is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol hold memory display 18b, the first special symbol hold comprising four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number. A storage indicator 18a is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Also, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided a first reserved memory display unit 18c for displaying the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit 18d for displaying the second reserved memory number. ing. In addition, you may make it provide the area | region (sum total pending | holding memory display part) which displays the total number (sum total pending memory count) which is the sum total of the 1st pending memory count and the 2nd pending memory count. As described above, if the summation pending storage display section for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that are not satisfied with the variable display start condition.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Moreover, the small display is formed in, for example, a square shape. Note that the normal symbol display 10 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) of, for example, 00 to 99. Further, the normal symbol display 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decoration lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying “O” and “X”). It may be comprised.

  On the display screen of the effect display device 9, an effect area 9 </ b> F where an effect that suggests a display result of a normal symbol, a display result of a special symbol, and an effect that suggests the type of variation pattern is displayed.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol “7”), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is changed from a disadvantageous state for the player to an advantageous state (a state in which a game ball can be won at the second start winning port 14) when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. Change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Furthermore, the probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal probability state is high (the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a result of a special symbol variation display is increased compared to the normal probability state) In the state), the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. Even in the short state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened) when the symbol variation time is shortened although it is not the probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. In addition, four speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right and lower left and right outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display 8a starts variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of decorative symbols. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display unit 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the decorative symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when a probable big hit is made, the game state is shifted to a high probability state, and the game ball is likely to start and win (that is, in the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9). It shifts to a high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that a variable display execution condition is easily established. In addition, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, the state is shifted to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 will be a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state where it is easy to start a winning (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is won increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state increases, and the start winning state becomes easy (high base state).

  In addition, the transition time of special symbols and decorative symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened. The frequency of being played (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory becomes faster), and the situation where an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it becomes easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (a special symbol process flag or the like) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. . The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying the decorative design is performed.

  The effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35 and from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70. Control the sound output.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as decorative symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data to be displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative symbols), and background image data. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation action on the trigger button 121 has been detected from the trigger sensor 125 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation action on the push button 120 has been detected from the push sensor 124 via the input port 106. Further, the production control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the operation rod 122A of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 106. To do. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105 to cause the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of a clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating a gaming state before stopping power supply (special symbol process flag, high probability flag, high base flag, etc.), and an area where the output state of the output port is saved (output) Port buffer), a portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Then, the process proceeds to step S14.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state recovery process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. In addition, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol per-determining random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state are initialized. Value is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been performed, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 503 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the type of the variation pattern or a random number for determining the variation pattern, and the display random number update process is for generating the display random number. This is a process for updating the count value of the counter. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol (normal random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). About the 1st special symbol display 8a, the 2nd special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output with respect to each display according to the content of the output buffer set by step S32, S33. Execute control.

  In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the big prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33).

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of decorative symbols prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, the non-reach PA 1-1 to the non-reach pattern are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. Further, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are variations patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-2 and Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-2 are prepared. Note that, as shown in FIG. 6, a variation pattern with a pseudo-series effect (an effect in which at least one temporary stop and re-change of a symbol is executed during one variable display) is used when reaching. Of these, when normal PB2-1 is used, re-variation is performed once. Of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 among the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition effects, re-variation is performed three times. Note that the re-variation is to temporarily execute the variable display of the decorative symbol after temporarily stopping the decorative symbol that is temporarily off from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Also, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -3 to Normal PB2-4, Super PA3-3 to SuperPA3-4, Super PB3-3 to Super PB3-4, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-3, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-2 Is prepared. In FIG. 6, the fluctuation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 and special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are fluctuation patterns used when sudden probability change big hit or small hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, when the normal PB2-3 is used among the fluctuation patterns that are used when the sudden sudden change is not big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, the re-variation is performed once. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-3 to super PA3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, for the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 that is used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-variation is performed once.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, the variation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, in the case of Super Reach A with pseudo-continuations, the variation time is 32). .75 seconds is fixed, and in the case of Super Reach A without pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds.) For example, even in the case of the same type of Super Reach, the total number of reserved storage Depending on the situation, the variation time may be different. For example, even with the same type of super reach, the variation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storage increases. Also, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the first reserved memory number. When the variable display of the two special symbols is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the second reserved memory number. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the reserved memory numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved memory numbers 3 and 4). For example, a determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number, and the change time may be varied.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot described later) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and then the variation pattern determined using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and include a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B. It may be divided into variable pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-ream, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence / absence of pseudo-continuous or slip effects.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, normal CA3-1, which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with only normal reach, and fluctuation with normal reach and pseudo-continuity. It is classified into a normal CA 3-2 that is a variation pattern type including a pattern and a super CA 3-3 that is a variation pattern type with super reach. In addition, in the case of sudden probability change big hit, it is classified into a special CA4-1 that is a fluctuation pattern type including a non-reach fluctuation pattern and a special CA4-2 that is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with reach. ing. Further, in the case of small hits, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern. Further, in the case of deviation, a non-reach CA 2-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern that does not involve reach, pseudo-ream or slip effect, and a variation pattern that does not involve reach but involves a pseudo-ream or slip effect. Includes non-reach CA2-2, which is a variation pattern type including, non-reach CA2-3, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of a shortened variation that does not involve reach, pseudo-ream, or slip production, and a variation pattern that includes only normal reach Normal CA2-4 which is a variation pattern type, normal CA2-5 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and two re-variation pseudo-continuations, and a variation pattern with normal reach and one re-variation pseudo-continuation Normal CA2-6, which is a variation pattern type that includes, and a variation pattern type with super reach Are the type divided into a certain super CA2-7.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number (1) and the random number for determination per ordinary symbol (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number instead of a hardware random number may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal jackpot determination table used in a normal probability state (a gaming state that is not a probability variation state) and a probability variation jackpot determination table used in a probability variation state. Each value described in the left column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each value described in the right column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is a jackpot determination value.

  In this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted to a high probability state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the big hit lottery is increased, and also to a high base state, There are two cases: a case where only the probability state is transferred and a state where the high base state is not transferred (ie, the low base state). Is a jackpot determination table for probability variation, and a normal jackpot determination table is used in other cases.

  8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 8B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), the values shown in FIG. Each numerical value listed is set. Moreover, the numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are small hit determination values.

  Note that it may be determined that a small hit is made only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Even if the game state is shifted to the probability change state, a small hit will be generated, and if it is configured to produce an effect asking whether or not the probability change will occur, even though the current game state is the probability change state, On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoying. Therefore, if it is configured so that the small hit does not occur during the variation display of the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the probability variation state, it is difficult for the small hit to occur and the excessive effect is not given to the probability variation. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the big hit determination values, the special symbol is decided to be a big hit (a normal big hit, a probable variation big hit, or a sudden probable big hit described later). Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, “probabilities” shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C indicate the probability (ratio) of small hits. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, a case where a small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 when the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. The ratio determined as “small hit” is higher than when the variable display is executed.

  FIGS. 8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. FIG. Among these, FIG. 8 (D) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. Further, FIG. 8E shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, based on the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type, the jackpot type is set to “normal jackpot”, “ This table is referred to in order to determine one of “probability big hit” and “sudden probability big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, eight determination values are assigned to “suddenly probable big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes). 8 is determined to be suddenly probable big hit), whereas the jackpot type determination table 131b is assigned two judgment values for “sudden probable big hit” (a ratio of 2/40) Will suddenly be determined to be a promising big hit). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol variation display is executed by starting the first start winning port 13 and the second special symbol of the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio determined as “suddenly probable big hit” is high. Note that “sudden probability variation big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table 131a, and “sudden probability variation big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table 131b (ie, It may be determined that “suddenly probable big hit” may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), two rounds of sudden probability change big hits as the first specific gaming state to which a predetermined amount of gaming value is given, There are cases where it is determined to be “normal jackpot” and “probable jackpot” of 15 rounds as the second specific gaming state that gives a large amount of game value, and is high when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed Although it is determined that the first specific gaming state is set in proportion, the gaming value to be given is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the allowable amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the big winning opening per round is increased as the gaming value is determined. Also good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the opening time of the big winning opening per game during the big hit may be determined as the gaming value. In addition, for example, even if the same 15 round big hits, the first specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening once per round and the second specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening multiple times per round It may be prepared to increase the gaming value of the second specific gaming state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in any case of the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, all 15 rounds in the case of the first specific gaming state) In the case of the second specific gaming state, there is an undigested round remaining), and it is possible to execute an effect in such a manner as to inquire whether or not the jackpot continues further. Then, in the case of the first specific gaming state, the jackpot game is ended based on the completion of all 15 rounds, and in the case of the second specific gaming state, it is based on the fact that the unsettled round remains. The jackpot game may be continued (an effect in which the bonus winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after the bonus game is completed 15 times).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, the types of jackpots include “normal jackpot”, “probability variation jackpot”, and “sudden probability variation jackpot”. In this embodiment, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is two types of 15 rounds and 2 rounds. However, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is limited to the one shown in this embodiment. Absent. For example, a jackpot that is controlled for a seven-round jackpot game or a jackpot that is controlled for a five-round jackpot game may be provided. Further, in this embodiment, there are three types of jackpot types, “normal jackpot”, “probability big hit” and “sudden probability big hit”, but not limited to three types, for example, four or more types of big hit types are provided. It may be. Conversely, the jackpot type may be less than three types, for example, only two types may be provided as the jackpot type.

  The “probable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to 15 rounds of the big hit gaming state and is shifted to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, the high probability state and the short time state (high The base state is also transferred (see steps S169 to S171 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S132 described later).

  In addition, “normal big hit” is controlled to 15 rounds of big hit gaming state, and after the big hit gaming state is finished, it is not shifted to the probabilistic state (high probability state), but the big hit is transferred only to the short time state (high base state). (See step S167 described later). Then, after shifting to the time reduction state, the time reduction state (high base state) is maintained until the execution of the variable symbol special display and the decorative symbol display is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) (see steps S137 to S140 described later). ). In this embodiment, the time reduction state (high base state) is ended even when a big hit occurs after the transition to the time reduction state and before the execution of the predetermined number of fluctuation displays is ended (step S132 described later). reference).

  In addition, “suddenly promising big hit” is allowed up to a small number of times that the big winning opening is opened compared to “probable big hit” or “normal big hit” (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). It is a big hit. In other words, when “suddenly promising big hit”, the game is controlled to a two round big hit gaming state. In addition, in "probable big hit" and "normal big hit", the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds, whereas in "sudden probable big hit", the opening time of the big winning opening per round is long. Is as short as 0.1 seconds, and it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to win a big prize during a big hit game. And in this embodiment, after the sudden probability variation big hit gaming state is finished, the transition is made to the probability variation state (in this embodiment, the transition is made only to the high probability state and not the high base state. (See S169 to S171).

  In this embodiment, even when the “small hit” is reached, the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, and the same control as the big hit gaming state by the “suddenly probable big hit” is performed. Is called. In the case of “small hit”, the game state does not change after the opening of the big winning opening twice, and the game state before “small hit” is maintained. By doing so, it becomes impossible to recognize whether it is a “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”, and the fun of the game is improved. For example, when the big hit types are all configured to be probable big hits, the small hits need not be provided.

  The big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with a random 1 value, and corresponding to the “normal big hit”, “probability variable big hit”, and “sudden probable big hit” (big hit type determination value) ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C includes numerical values (determination values) to be compared with random value (random 2) values for variation pattern type determination, which are normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, A determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of super CA3-3, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2 is set.

  For example, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 9A used when the big hit type is “normal big hit”, and FIG. 9B used when the big hit type is “probable big hit”. The allocation of determination values for the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3 is different from the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B.

  As described above, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the big hit type. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, in the case of “ordinary big hit” or “probable big hit”, the value of random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 150 to 251, it can be seen that variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

  In addition, for the super reach big hit, the variation pattern type with pseudo-continuity (variation pattern type including the variation pattern of Super PA3-3 and Super PA3-4) and the variation pattern type without super-continuity (Super PB3-3, Super It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of PB3-4. In this case, in both the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A for normal big hit and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B for probability variation big hit, the variation pattern type with super reach and pseudo-ream, super reach and pseudo ream A variation pattern type that is not accompanied is assigned.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C used when the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, for example, when the big hit type such as special CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is other than “suddenly probable big hit”. A determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no determination value is assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, it is different from the normal big hit or the big hit state with the probable big hit. The variation pattern type can be determined.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D has a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9D, when it is determined to be a small hit, the case where the special CA4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type is shown. .

  FIGS. 10A to 10C are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D. Among these, FIG. 10A shows a case where the gaming state is a low base state (high probability / low base state or low probability / low base state) and the number of memories (total number of pending storage) is less than 3. A variation pattern type determination table 135A for loss to be used is shown. Also, FIG. 10B shows the fluctuation for loss used when the gaming state is a low base state (high probability / low base state or low probability / low base state) and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. A pattern type determination table 135B is shown. Also, FIG. 10C shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135C used when the gaming state is a high base state (high probability / high base state or low probability / high base state). . The deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C have a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is an off symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10, separate variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> B to 135 </ b> D are used for the case where the gaming state is the high base state and the case where the total pending storage number is 3 or more. It may be configured to use a common deviation variation pattern type determination table in the case of the state and in the case where the total pending storage number is 3 or more. In the example shown in FIG. 10C, the common high base deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C is used regardless of the total number of pending storage, but the high base deviation variation pattern type determination table is used. A plurality of deviation variation pattern determination tables (tables with different ratios of determination values) corresponding to the total number of pending storages may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the low base state, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the total pending storage number is less than 3 and the total pending storage number is 3 or more. Two types of tables, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B used in the case, are used, but the method of dividing the variation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2) , The deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4... May be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values stored in the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0-2, the total pending storage number 3, the total pending storage number 4,... May be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of deviation variation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of reserved storages. A plurality of them may be provided. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, a deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory number). The deviation variation pattern type determination table for 0, for the first reserved memory number, for the first reserved memory number for 2, for the first reserved memory number for three, for the first reserved memory number for four, etc. Each may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the first reserved memory number 0 to 2, the first reserved memory number 3, the first reserved memory number 4, and so on may be used. Even in this case, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are large (for example, 3 or more), it may be configured such that a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected. . Even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

  Note that the “specific variable display pattern” is a variation pattern with a high reach, such as a variation pattern with super reach, and a variation pattern type and variation pattern that can make the player have a sense of expectation for the big hit. That is. Further, the “expected degree (reliability) for the big hit” means an appearance rate (probability) that a big hit appears when variable display (for example, variable display with super reach) according to a specific performance mode is executed. For example, the expectation degree of jackpot when the variable display with super reach is executed is determined as (the rate at which super reach is executed when the jackpot is determined) / (when the jackpot is determined and out of place) Is calculated by calculating the rate at which super reach is performed on both.

  Each of the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, which is non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-. 3, a determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is low and the game state is a low base state, a random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is used. If the value is 230 to 251, it can be seen that variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed regardless of the total number of pending storage.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is low and the game state is a low base state, a random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is used. If the value is 1 to 79, it can be seen that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least without the reach (without the effect such as the pseudo-ream and the slide effect) regardless of the total number of reserved storage. Due to such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (displacement variation pattern type determination table 135A, 135B) includes at least one of the variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (variation pattern with reach). Regardless of the number of rights (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, combined reserved memory number) stored in the reserved memory means (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer) for a part, Common determination values (1 to 79 in the examples shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B) are assigned. Note that the “variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern” means that, as shown in this embodiment, for example, the variable display result is not accompanied by a reach, and is not accompanied by an effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slide effect. It is a variable display pattern (fluctuation pattern) used when a big hit is not made.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, a common jackpot variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current gaming state, but the current gaming state is a probability variation state or a normal probability state. Depending on whether or not there is a big hit variation pattern type determination table prepared separately. In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation pattern for shortening variation is determined by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 10B. In some cases, the threshold value of the total number of reserved memories (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number) when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state may be varied. . For example, when the gaming state is a low base state, when the total reserved memory number is 3 (or when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is 2, for example), for shortening The variation pattern type determination table for misalignment is selected so that the variation pattern of the shortened variation may be determined. When the gaming state is the high base state, the total number of pending storages of 1 and 2 is smaller Even in this case (or, for example, even when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are smaller 0 or 1), the fluctuation pattern type determination table for shortening is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern of the shortening fluctuation. You may be made to be.

  FIGS. 11A and 11B are explanatory views showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B determine the fluctuation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is one of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 or super CA3-3, and the variation pattern type is specially selected. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that either CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is selected. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random pattern random number (random 3) value according to the variation pattern type. Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” is included.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11A, as the variation pattern types, normal CA3-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-continuity are used. A case is shown in which a normal CA 3-2 is classified into a normal CA 3-2 and a super CA 3-3 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach (which may be accompanied by a pseudo-ream). In the example shown in FIG. 11B, as the variation pattern type, a special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and a special CA4- that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach are used. 2 shows a case of classification into two. In FIG. 11B, the variation pattern type may be divided according to the presence / absence of effects such as pseudo-ream and sliding effects, instead of being classified according to the presence / absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes special PG 1-1 and special PG 2-1, which are fluctuation patterns not accompanied by effects such as pseudo-ream and slip effects. You may comprise so that special PG1-2, special PG1-3, and special PG2-2 accompanying effects, such as an effect, may be included.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. When it is determined that the variable display result is “out of”, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is based on a random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of a decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to variable display of a special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 9 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the decorative symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), so the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  The command 8E01 (H) is a normal symbol start designation (hit) command indicating that the display result of the normal symbol is a win and starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol. The command 8E02 (H) is a normal symbol. This is a normal symbol start designation (deletion) command that indicates that the display result of is out of the range, and that normal symbol variation starts. Command 8E03 (H) is a normal symbol change end designation command indicating that normal symbol change (variable display) is to be ended. However, in this embodiment, since the variation time of the normal symbol is constant according to the gaming state (high base state / low base state), it is not necessary to use the normal symbol variation end designation command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative symbols and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  Commands A001 and A002 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). In this embodiment, a big hit start designation command or a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command is used according to the type of big hit. Specifically, the big hit start designation command (A001 (H)) is used for “normal big hit” or “probable big hit”, and the small hit for “suddenly promiscuous big hit” or “small hit”. / Sudden probability change big hit start designation command (A002 (H)) is used. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to transmit a fanfare designation command for suddenly probable big hit start designation in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. Since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round, and the command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for designating round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a command for opening a special prize opening (A10A (H)) for designating round 10. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted, a different designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when ending the first round during the big hit game, a designation command (A201 (H)) after the big winning opening is designated to designate round 1, and when the tenth round during the big hit game is ended. Is sent after a special winning opening opening command (A30A (H)) for designating round 10.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game (a jackpot end designation command: an ending 1 designation command). The jackpot end designation command (A301 (H)) is used to end the jackpot game by the “normal jackpot” or the “probability big hit”. Command A302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command: ending 2 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change big hit game. The game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit an ending designation command for suddenly probable big hit end designation in the case of sudden probable big hit, but not to send an ending designation command in the case of small hit. Also good.

  Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / low base state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a low probability / low base state. Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / high base state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a low probability / high base state. Command B003 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / low base state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a high probability / low base state. Command B004 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / high base state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning designation command) that designates that the first start winning has been won. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning designation command) for designating that the second starting win has been won. In this embodiment, hereinafter, the first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command.

  Command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has increased by one.

  In this embodiment, for the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, an effect control command indicating that the reserved memory number has increased is transmitted, but the effect control for designating the reserved memory number itself. A command may be transmitted. In this case, for example, an effect control command for designating which one of the first start prize opening 13 and the second start prize opening 14 is won is transmitted, and the reserved memory number designation command for designating the reserved memory number is designated as the first. A common effect control command is transmitted between the number of the first reserved memory and the number of the second reserved memory.

  Further, when the number of reserved memories decreases, a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (a first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or a second reserved memory number subtraction) indicating that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has decreased. (Designated command) may be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, as the command for designating the number of reserved memories, when the first reserved memory increases, a first reserved memory number addition designation command for designating an increase in the first reserved memory number is transmitted, and the second When the reserved memory increases, a second reserved memory number addition designation command for specifying an increase in the second reserved memory number is transmitted, but a combined reserved memory number designation command for designating the total reserved memory number may be transmitted. Good.

  Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. The command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol design command) indicating whether or not the big win is out of the winning determination results, whether or not the big win is determined, and the determination result of the type of the big win. The command C6XX (H) is an effect control command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number is included in the winning determination result. (Variation category command).

  In this embodiment, in the winning determination process described later (see FIG. 27), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not it will be a big hit, a small hit or not, Then, it is determined in which determination value range the random value for determining the variation pattern type falls. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating a big hit or a small hit or a value for designating a big hit type is set, and control for transmission to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Further, a value for designating a range of a determination value as a determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and the type of the big hit, Based on the variation category command, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined determination value.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, EXT data is set and a symbol designating command is transmitted according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made and the type of the big hit.

  For example, in the winning determination process described later, when it is determined that the game is “displaced”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designating command (symbol 1 designating command) in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that the “normal big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 2 designation command) in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “probability big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 3 designation command) in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “suddenly promising big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 4 designation command) in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the “small hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 5 designation command) in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Note that the EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to share data to be read when setting a symbol designating command and when setting a display result specifying command.

  16 and 17 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the contents of the variable category command. As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, in this embodiment, which gaming state is displayed, which display result is a special symbol or decorative symbol display result, a random number for determining a variation pattern type at the time of starting winning A value is set in the EXT data according to whether it is determined that any of the determination values falls within the range, and a variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in a low base state (high probability / low base state or low probability / low base state) and is out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning determination process described later, Then, it is determined whether or not the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the low base state, the variation pattern of the non-reach CA 2-1 is within the range of the determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the number of reserved memories (total number of reserved memories). Since the types are assigned in common, the production control microcomputer 100 recognizes that at least the variation pattern type is non-reach CA 2-1 based on the reception of the variation category 1 command. it can. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 2 command in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 3 command in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 100 and 169, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 6 command in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 215 and 229, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 8 command in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the low base state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 based on the reception of the variation category 8 command.

  Note that the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 used to determine which of the above-mentioned variation categories belong are specifically shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B. This is derived by extracting a value that can be a boundary of a range of determination values assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table for loss. This is the same for the other variation categories 9 to 10 and 21 to 29, and assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. 9 (A) to (D) or FIG. 10 (C). A threshold value used for category determination is derived by extracting a value that can be a boundary of the range of the determined determination value.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is a high base state (high probability / high base state or low probability / high base state) and is out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning determination processing described later, the CPU 56 First, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 219. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-3), the CPU 56 performs the variation in which “08 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Send category 9 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “09 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 220 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7). Send a variable category 10 command.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the “usual big hit” is obtained at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning determination process described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74. Determine whether. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “10 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 21 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “11 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 75 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A variation category 22 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “12 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3). A variable category 23 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the “probable big hit” is made at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning determination process described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38. Determine whether. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “13 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 24 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 39 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). Send a variation category 25 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3-3). Send a variable category 26 command.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a sudden probability variation big hit is made at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning determination process described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100. Determine. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “16 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 27 commands are transmitted. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-2), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “17 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 28 commands are transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit is made at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates a decorative pattern variation pattern every time there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 by the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  Next, the normal symbol process (step S28) executed by the CPU 56 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol process. In the normal symbol process, when detecting that the gate switch 32a is turned on, that is, that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 (step S411), the CPU 56 executes a gate switch passage process (step S412). Thereafter, any one of steps S400 to S404 is executed.

  The processes in steps S400 to S404 are as follows.

  Normal symbol normal processing (step S400): The CPU 56 is in a state where normal symbol variation can be started (for example, the normal symbol change display is not being executed in the normal symbol display 10 and a variable prize is awarded). When the ball device 15 is not in the open state), the value of the gate passing memory number is confirmed. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory number counter is confirmed. If the gate passing memory number is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not to stop the normal symbol as a winning symbol). Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“1” in this example) indicating the normal symbol variation pattern setting process (step S401).

  Normal symbol variation pattern setting process (step S401): A normal symbol process is set by setting a value corresponding to a variable display time (variation time of a normal symbol) until a regular symbol is variably displayed and displayed. Start the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“2” in this example) corresponding to the normal symbol variation process (step S402).

  Normal symbol variation processing (step S402): The CPU 56 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, stops the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10. In addition, the normal symbol process timer is started by setting a value corresponding to the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer, and the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating the normal symbol stop time process (step S403) ( In this example, it is updated to “3”).

  Normal symbol stop process (step S403): The CPU 56 checks whether or not the normal symbol stop symbol is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a missing symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“0” in this example) indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S400). If the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the normal symbol process timer is started by setting a value corresponding to the normal electric accessory operating time in the normal symbol process timer. Further, the variable winning ball apparatus (ordinary electric accessory) 15 is opened. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (in this example, “4”) indicating the process for releasing the normal electric accessory (step S404).

  Processing during normal electric accessory opening (step S404): When the normal symbol process timer times out, the CPU 56 closes the variable winning ball apparatus 15 and sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the normal symbol normal processing (step S400). It is updated to the value shown (in this example, “0”).

  FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a normal symbol hit determination table in which a determination value related to a normal symbol hit is set. In this embodiment, the range of random numbers for determination per ordinary symbol is 1 to 250. However, in the determination table for normal symbol, a determination value is set by comparing with the random number for determination per normal symbol.

  FIG. 19A shows a table used in the low base state. As shown in FIG. 19A, in the low base state, it is determined that there is a probability of 2/250. If it is determined that the winning is achieved, the variable winning ball device (ordinary electric accessory) 15 is opened once (the opening time is 5.8 seconds). In the low base state, the normal symbol variation time (variable display time) is 10 seconds. However, a plurality of types of variation time may be prepared as the variation time of the normal symbol, and the CPU 56 may select the variation time to be used from among them. In addition, a plurality of types or both of the number of opening times and the opening time (for example, a time shorter than 5.8 seconds) of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are prepared, and the CPU 56 sets either or both of the number of opening times and the opening time. You may make it select.

  Moreover, you may further provide per short period opening | release time of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 for example 0.2 second. In such a case, a contact that opens for a long period of time (for example, 5.8 seconds) after being opened for 0.2 seconds is provided so as to increase the player's expectation (relative to long-term opening) when opening for a short period of time. Also good. In addition, when both a short-term opening only and a long-term opening after a short period are provided, the timing for notifying the predetermined effect (◯) or the predetermined effect (×) It may be after opening. In such a case, it is impossible to know whether or not the opening will be performed for a long time by executing the predetermined effect at the time when the opening is performed for a short period, and the player's sense of expectation (relative to the long-term opening) Can be further enhanced.

  FIG. 19B shows a table used in the high base state (short time state). As shown in FIG. 19B, in the high base state, it is determined that there is a probability of 249/250. If it is determined that the winning is achieved, the variable winning ball apparatus (ordinary electric accessory) 15 is opened three times (each opening time is 1.8 seconds). In the high base state, the normal symbol variation time (variable display time) is 1.5 seconds. As shown in FIG. 19, when the gaming state is in the low base state, it is a hit with a low probability, and when it is in the high base state, the probability is very high (in this example, it is approximately 100%, but it may be 100%). It ’s a hit.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, in the high base state, the probability that the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is a hit is higher than in the low base state. Thus, in the high base state, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is easily opened to increase the frequency of opening, so that it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the probability that the normal symbol variation display result is the same in the high base state and the low base state is the same, but in the high base state, the low base state In comparison, by increasing the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (the normal electric accessory release time shown in FIG. 19), it is configured to make it easier to start and win in the high base state. May be.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the gate switch passage processing. In the gate switch passage processing, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the count value (gate passage storage number) of the gate passage storage counter has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example) (step S415). If the maximum value has not been reached, the CPU 56 increments the count value of the gate passing memory counter by 1 (step S416), extracts the value of the random number for determination per ordinary symbol (random 4), which is a software random number, and stores the gate passing memory. The data is stored in a storage area corresponding to the number value (a general-purpose holding storage buffer provided in the RAM 55) (step S417). Further, the CPU 56 increases the number of lighting of the normal symbol hold storage display 41 by 1 (step S418).

  In the normal symbol normal process in step S400, the CPU 56 is in a state in which the normal symbol can be changed, and if the number of stored gate passages is not zero, the CPU 56 stores the symbol in the storage area (normal symbol holding storage buffer). It is determined whether or not to win (whether or not to stop the normal symbol as a winning symbol) using the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol and the normal symbol determining table shown in FIG. To do. That is, when the value of the random number for determination per normal symbol matches any of the determination values (determination values corresponding to the hit) set in the determination table per normal symbol, it is determined as a win. If it is determined that the game is a hit, the normal symbol hit flag is set. If the gaming state is the low base state (if the high base flag is not set), the CPU 56 uses the table shown in FIG. 19A, and if the gaming state is the high base state (the high base flag). If is set), the table shown in FIG. 19B is used. In this embodiment, the fact that the normal symbol variation display result is a win is also expressed as a win.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation pattern setting process (step S401) in the normal symbol process. In the normal symbol variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the current gaming state is a high base state (step S431). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the high base flag is set. If it is in the high base state, a value corresponding to 1.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer (step S432). In the low base state, a value corresponding to 10 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer (step S433).

  Further, when the normal symbol normal process is determined to win (when the normal symbol per flag is set) (step S434), it is determined that the display result of the normal symbol is used and the normal symbol is displayed. Control is performed to transmit a normal symbol start designation (hit) command indicating the start of symbol variation to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S435). If the normal symbol normal processing is determined to be off, a normal symbol start designation (off) command indicating that the normal symbol display result has been determined to be off and normal symbol variation is to be started is issued. Control to transmit to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S436).

  Next, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the gate passage storage counter by -1 (step S437), sets the value of the gate passage storage counter after the subtraction (that is, the number of reserved common memory) to EXT data, Control is performed to transmit the memory number designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S438).

  Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “2”) corresponding to the normal symbol variation process (step S402) (step S439).

  When transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command as a pointer. . And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S28).

  In this embodiment, in the normal symbol variation pattern setting process, the normal symbol variation start designation command and the common symbol reserved memory number designation command are transmitted. In the normal symbol normal processing in step S400, the normal symbol display result is hit. After determining whether or not to perform, a normal symbol variation start designation command may be transmitted, or a count value of the gate passing memory counter is decremented by 1, and a common figure reserved memory number designation command may be transmitted. Good.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (step S402). In the normal symbol variation process, the CPU 56 checks whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S441). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S441), the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S445).

  When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (Y in step S441), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal symbol variation end designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Along with (Step S442), the normal symbol stop symbol display time is set in the normal symbol process timer (Step S443). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S403) (step S444).

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol stop process (step S403). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S451). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out, the value of the normal symbol process timer is decremented by 1 (step S452).

  When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the normal symbol per flag is set (step S453).

  When the normal symbol per flag is set, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the normal electric accessory operating time (5.8 seconds or 1.8 seconds) in the normal symbol process timer (step S454). Further, the CPU 56 opens the variable winning ball device (ordinary electric accessory) 15 (step S455).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “4”) indicating the process for releasing the normal electric accessory (step S404) (step S459).

  If it is determined in step S453 that the normal symbol per flag is not set, the CPU 56 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S400). Update (step S460).

  The CPU 56 subtracts the value of the normal symbol process timer by 1 in the process during opening of the normal electric accessory, and when the value of the normal symbol process timer becomes 0, the variable winning ball apparatus (ordinary electric accessory) 15 is closed. To do. When the normal electric accessory operating time is 5.8 seconds (when one release is performed, that is, in the low base state), the value of the normal symbol process flag is set to the normal symbol normal process (step S400). ) To a value (specifically “0”). When the normal electric accessory operating time is 1.8 seconds (when three releases are performed, that is, in the high base state), when the three releases are completed, the normal symbol process flag The value is updated to a value indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S400). When the opening of the three times is not completed, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the normal electric accessory operating time (1.8 seconds) in the normal symbol process timer, and sets the variable winning ball apparatus 15 to the open state again. To do. The CPU 56 does not immediately open the variable winning ball device 15 but opens it when a predetermined interval time has elapsed.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 does not transmit an effect control command relating to the open state of the variable winning ball device 15, but indicates closing when the open state of the variable winning ball device 15 ends. An effect control command may be transmitted. When the game control microcomputer 560 performs control so that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed when there is a predetermined number of winnings even if the opening time has not elapsed, the effect controlling microcomputer 100 still has the variable winnings. Although it is recognized that the ball device 15 is open, a situation occurs in which the variable winning ball device 15 is actually closed. When configured to transmit an effect control command indicating closure, such erroneous recognition of the effect control microcomputer 100 can be prevented. In addition, when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is configured to notify that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is open, the effect control microcomputer 100 can end the notification based on the effect control command indicating closing.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a start port switch passing process (step S312). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable symbol special display can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the combined hold storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol. Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the decorative symbols when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. In addition, control is performed to transmit the special winning opening open designation command to the production control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the special winning opening open processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S306. To a value corresponding to (6 in this example). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the command for opening a special prize opening is specified, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for designating round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a command for opening a special prize opening (A10A (H)) for designating round 10.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special prize opening opening process, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, control is performed to transmit the designation command after the big hit release to the effect control microcomputer 100, and when all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S307 (this In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Also, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a high probability flag or a high base flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed every time the big winning opening during the small hit game is opened. It is also a process to start.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the big prize opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. Update. In addition, when all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end processing (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the first start port switch 13a is in an ON state (step S1211). If the first start port switch 13a is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to step S1223. If the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first reserved memory for counting the first reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 is confirmed (step S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S1223.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1213), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1214).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 26) (step S1215). . In the process of step S1215, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the start opening switch passage process (at the time of start winning), but is extracted at the start of the variation of the first special symbol. May be. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the hold storage buffer. As shown in FIG. 26, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. Being formed in the RAM means an area in the RAM.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag indicating that the gaming state is the high base state is set (step S1216). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S1219. If the high base flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S1217). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, if it is a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1219 as it is.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, the CPU 56 executes a winning determination process for determining the variation display result and the variation pattern type in advance when the variation based on the detected starting winning is executed. (Step S1218).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1219). Further, the CPU 56 performs control for transmitting a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning determination process (step S1220), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1221). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1222).

  Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the address of the command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command is given. Set to pointer. And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S28).

  Further, by executing the processing of steps S1220 and S1221, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 starts the winning at the first start winning opening 13 and executes the winning effect processing at step S1218, every time the symbol designation command is executed. And the variation category command are both transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 occurs by executing the processing of steps S1219 to S1222, the first start winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category A set of four commands, that is, a command and a first reserved memory number addition designation command, are transmitted in a batch in one timer interrupt process.

  However, when the winning effect processing in step S1218 is not executed because it is determined as Y in step S1216 or step S1217, the CPU 56 issues only the first start winning designation command and the first reserved storage number addition designation command. The control for transmitting is performed, and the control for transmitting the winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variation category command) is not performed. Note that, when the winning effect processing in step S1218 is not executed, a winning determination result designation in which a value (for example, “FF (H)”) indicating that the winning determination result cannot be specified is set as EXT data is designated. A command (design designation command, variation category command) may be transmitted.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of step S1216 is executed, and there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13, the process of step S1218 is performed only when the gaming state is the low base state. Winning effect processing is executed. Further, in this embodiment, when the process of step S1217 is executed, and there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13, step S1218 is performed only when it is not the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The award winning directing process is executed. It should be noted that the process may not be shifted to step S1218 only when the game state is a big hit game state, and the game process may be executed at step S1218 when the game state is a small hit game state.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) is a control in which the jackpot is opened for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) after it is notified that the jackpot is started. It is a state until it is informed that the opening of the big winning opening in the final round is finished and the jackpot is finished. Specifically, it is a state in which the processes from the big winning opening opening pre-process (see step S305) to the big hit end process (see step S307) in the special symbol process are executed.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second start port switch 14a is on (step S1223). If the second start port switch 14a is not in the ON state, the process is terminated. If the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved memory for counting the second reserved memory number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 (step S1224). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process is terminated.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1225), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1226).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 26) (step S1227). . Note that in the process of step S1227, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the start-port switch passing process (at the time of start winning), but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. May be. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning determination process (step S1228). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1229). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning determination process (step S1230), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1231). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1232).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the winning determination process in steps S1218 and S1228. In the winning determination process, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1215 and S1227 with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S220). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the decorative symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing to be described later, determining the big hit type or changing the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting processing In addition to that, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, before the change display based on the start winning is started, By executing the determination process at the time of winning, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the jackpot or the jackpot is reached, and in which judgment value range the value of the jackpot type or the random number for determining the variation pattern type. By doing so, the variation display result and the variation pattern type are predicted in advance before the decorative symbol variation display is executed, and, as will be described later, based on the determination result at the time of winning, the effect control microcomputer A pre-reading notice effect for notifying that a big hit or a super reach will be announced during the decorative pattern change display by 100 is executed.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the normal jackpot determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state. High probability / high base state and high probability / It is confirmed whether or not a high probability flag indicating that the low base state is included is set (step S221). If the high probability flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1215 and S1227 with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S222).

  Although this embodiment is configured to preferentially execute the variation display of the second special symbol, in the winning determination process, the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) is set to the low probability state. Only the process of comparing with the jackpot determination value at the time may be executed and not compared with the jackpot determination value at the high probability state (specifically, only the process of step S220 is executed, and steps S221 and S222 are executed) It is also possible not to execute the process. With such a configuration, when the display is performed with priority given to the variation display of the second special symbol, the determination result of the jackpot in the determination at the time of winning does not match the determination result of the jackpot at the actual start of variation. The situation can be prevented from occurring.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (N in step S222), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1215 and S1227 and FIG. ) And (C) are compared with the small hit determination values to confirm whether or not they match (step S223). In this case, when there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning determination process of step S1218 is executed), the CPU 56 determines the small hit determination table (first 1B) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set for the special symbol. Further, when there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning determination process in step S1228 is executed), the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8C. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data “00 (H)” indicating “out of” in the symbol designation command. Is performed (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process for determining the current gaming state (step S225). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state and a high base state (specifically, the high probability flag and the high base flag are set in step S225). Whether or not). In addition, after confirming whether or not the high probability state and the high base state are set in step S225 at the time of starting winning, until the display of fluctuation based on the starting winning is actually started, Multiple variable displays may be performed. Therefore, the game state after the start winning is confirmed in step S225 whether or not it is in the high probability state and the high base state until the actual display of variation based on the start winning is actually started. May change (for example, when a probability variation big hit or sudden probability variation big hit occurs before the start of fluctuation, the normal probability state changes to a probability variation state). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S225 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) do not necessarily match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored storage is specified, and a determination at the time of starting winning is made based on the changed game state. Also good.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold for detachment according to the determination result of step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold determination program for performing threshold determination in advance is incorporated, and by determining whether or not the threshold value is larger than the threshold value, the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within any determination value range. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is determined.

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 219 when it is determined that the gaming state is the high base state. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 219 in step S232 to be described later. Is determined to set “08 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold 219 (that is, 220 to 251), it is determined that “09 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  For example, when the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the low base state, the threshold value 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 are set regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 in step S232 described later. Is determined to set “00 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 89 or less (that is, 80 to 89), it is determined that “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 99 or less (that is, 90 to 99), it is determined that “02 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 169 or less (that is, 100 to 169), it is determined that “03 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined that “04 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold is 214 or less (ie, 200 to 214), it is determined that “05 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold value is 229 or less (that is, when it is 215 to 229), it is determined that “06 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is not less than 229 (that is, 230 to 251), it is determined that “07 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  In the threshold determination example described above, 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 are determined in order from the smallest threshold value. It will never fall within the range below the previous order threshold. That is, after determining whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, when determining whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, it does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 that is equal to or less than the threshold value in the previous order. It is determined whether it is in the range. In this embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in order from the smallest value is shown. Conversely, 229, 214, You may determine with 199, 169, 99, 89, and 79. The same applies to the determination using other threshold values shown below.

  Note that the threshold value in the low base state may always be set without determining the gaming state in step S225. Even in such a configuration, the range of determination values is shared by at least the variation pattern type that is “non-reach” and the variation pattern type that is “super-reach”. It can be determined whether or not it is “out of” or “out of super reach”.

  When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y of step S223), the CPU 56 uses the EXT data “05 (H)” indicating “small hit” as a symbol designating command. Is set (step S227).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a threshold for small hits (step S228). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 251 and determines in step S232 described later that the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is equal to or less than the threshold value 251 (1 to 251). Then, it is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data “18 (H)” is set without performing the threshold determination.

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1215 and S1227. Is determined (step S229). In this case, when there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning determination process in step S1218 is executed), the CPU 56 determines the big hit type determination table (first 1D) shown in FIG. Using the special symbol 131a, it is determined whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probable big hit” or “sudden probability big hit”. When there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning determination process at step S1228 is executed), the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 131b is used to determine whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probable big hit” or “suddenly probable big hit”.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the symbol designation command (step S230). In this case, when it is determined that the “normal big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data “01 (H)” indicating the “normal big hit” in the symbol designation command. If it is determined that “probability big hit”, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “02 (H)” indicating “probability big hit” in the symbol designation command. If it is determined that the “sudden probability change big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data “03 (H)” indicating “sudden probability change big hit” in the symbol designation command.

  And CPU56 sets each threshold value for jackpots according to the jackpot classification determined by step S229 (step S231).

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the thresholds 74 and 149 when it is determined as “ordinary big hit”. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 (that is, 1 to 74). Is determined to set “10 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is 149 or less (that is, 75 to 149), it is determined that “11 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold value 149 (ie, 150 to 251), it is determined that “12 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines “probability big hit”, the thresholds 38 and 79 are set. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 38 in step S232 described later. Is determined to set “13 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined that “14 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined that “15 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Further, for example, if the CPU 56 determines “suddenly promising big hit”, it sets the threshold 100. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold value 100 in step S232 described later, and if it is less than or equal to the threshold value 100 (that is, 1 to 100). Is determined to set “16 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold is not less than 100 (that is, 101 to 251), it is determined that “17 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold value set in steps S226, S228, and S231 and the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) extracted in steps S1215 and S1227 to determine which value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is. It is determined whether it is within the range of the determination value (step S232).

  In steps S226, S228, and S231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is set. In step S232, the set variation pattern type is set. A determination table may be used to determine the range of the variation pattern type determination random number and which variation pattern type.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result to the variable category command (step S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines “00 (H)” to “0B (H)”, “10” as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 depending on which variation pattern type is determined in step S232. A process of setting any value of (H) ”to“ 18 (H) ”to the EXT data of the variable category command is performed.

  In this embodiment, although the case where it is determined that the big win or the small win is determined in the determination at the time of winning, the range in which the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is uniformly determined is shown. When it is determined that the game is a big hit or a small hit, the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type may not be determined. Then, when a big win or a small win is received, a symbol designating command indicating that the determination at the time of winning is made may be transmitted, and a variation category command comprehensively indicating that the variation pattern type of a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. . For example, although the production control microcomputer 100 does not specifically show which variation pattern type, the variation indicated that it will be one of the big hit variation pattern types. Based on the reception of the category command, a prefetch notice effect described later may be executed.

  28 and 29 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of reserved storage (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed.

  If the total pending storage number is 0, it is confirmed whether or not the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completion flag is set (step S51A). If the customer waiting demo designation command transmitted flag is set, the process is terminated. If the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag is not set, the customer waiting demonstration designation command is executed on the condition that a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the total pending storage count becomes zero. Control to transmit to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S51B). And a customer waiting demonstration designation | designated command transmission completion flag is set (step S51C), and a process is complete | finished. The customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag is reset when the next special symbol variation display is started. In this embodiment, when the period during which the special symbol does not change (variable display) exceeds 30 seconds, the customer waiting demonstration effect is started.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 resets the customer waiting demo designation command transmitted flag if it is set (step S51D). Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step S52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 has a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating “second” (step S53). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 66 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  By executing the processes of steps S52 to S54, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. That is, control is performed so that the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and stores each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Shift content. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 stores the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S57).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the current gaming state (step S58). In this case, when the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set and the high base flag indicating the high base state is set, the CPU 56 sets the high probability / high base state. Controls transmission of the background designation command. Further, when only the high probability flag is set and the high base flag is not set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a high probability / low base state background designation command. Further, when only the high base flag is set and the high probability flag is not set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a low probability / high base state background designation command. Further, if neither the high probability flag nor the high base flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a low probability / low base state background designation command.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes a jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 reads out the big hit determination random number extracted in step S1215 or step S1227 of the start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and makes a big hit determination. The big hit determination module compares the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (see FIG. 8) determined in advance with the big hit determination random number, and if they match, executes the process of determining the big hit or the small hit It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  In the big hit determination process, when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), the big hit is greater than when the gaming state is a non-probability change state (normal probability state). The probability is high. Specifically, a jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the right side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance and the number of jackpot determination values are definitely changed. A normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) set smaller than the hour big hit determination table is provided. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the probability state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is a probable change state is determined by whether or not the high probability flag is set. The high probability flag is set when the gaming state shifts to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state ends. Specifically, it is determined to be “probability big hit” or “sudden probability big hit”, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game.

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) To determine whether or not to make a small hit. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. . If it is determined to be a small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

  If the value of the random R does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S75.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8D. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects a big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select a type (“normal jackpot”, “probability change”) corresponding to the value of the random number for random determination (random 1) stored in the random number buffer area. "Big hit" or "Suddenly probable big hit") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 reads the big hit type determination random number extracted in step S1215 or step S1227 of the start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and determines the big hit type. Do. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the rate at which suddenly probable big hits are selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “probable big hit”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” which is a loss symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of “1”, “3”, and “7”, which is a big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “suddenly promising big hit”, “1” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “normal big hit” is decided, “3” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol. If “probable big hit” is determined, “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown, but the method for determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is as follows. It is not restricted to what was shown in embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on a random number for determining the big hit type. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. 9A) as tables used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. ) To (C)) is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 9D) as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. )) Is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag indicating the high base state is set (step S95). Note that the high base flag is set when the gaming state shifts to the short time state (high base state), and is reset when the short time state (high base state) ends. Specifically, it is determined to be “ordinary jackpot” or “probability jackpot”, and is set in the process of ending the jackpot game.

  If the high base flag is not set (step S95), that is, if the gaming state is a low base state (high probability / low base state or low probability / low base state), the CPU 56 adds the total number of pending storages. It is confirmed whether or not is 3 or more (step S97). When the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (step S97), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135A for detachment as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. 10A) is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the total pending storage number is 3 or more, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135B for deviation as a table to be used for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types (FIG. 10B). )) Is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the high base flag is set, that is, if the gaming state is a high probability / high base state or a low probability / high base state, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. As a table to be used for this purpose, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C (see FIG. 10C) is selected (step S101). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S95 to S101 is executed, and the gaming state is in the low base state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the offending shown in FIG. The variation pattern type determination table 135B is selected. When the gaming state is the high base state, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C shown in FIG. 10C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S102, which will be described later. If the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process changes in step S105. Short reach variation non-reach PA1-2 is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the high base state or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, a variation display of the shortening variation may be performed. In this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation (see FIG. 10C) used in the high probability / high base state and the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storage ( Although the table is different from that shown in FIG. 10B, a common table may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is a high base state, when the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0 or 1), The change display of the shortening change may not be performed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S95, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is substantially zero. The determination table 135A (see FIG. 10A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer) and selects it in the process of steps S92, S94, S98, S99 or S101. By referring to the table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S102).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B (see FIG. 11) as tables used to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S102. ), One of the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 12) is selected (step S103). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S103. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S105). When the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S107).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S109).

  In the case where it is determined that it is out of place, instead of immediately determining the variation pattern type, it may be determined whether or not the reach is determined by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S95 to S102 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, the variation pattern type determination table for non-reach (including the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 shown in FIG. 10) and the variation pattern type determination table for reach (FIG. 10). Normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6, including a variation pattern type of super CA2-7) are prepared, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases. In this case, for example, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table is met in determining whether or not “super reach out” or “non-reach out” in the winning determination process. By determining whether or not, it may be determined in advance whether or not to reach. In addition, considering that the execution ratio of the notice effect is reduced, as shown in this embodiment, the “super-reach out” is performed depending on the variation pattern type without performing the lottery process using the random number for reach determination. It is preferable to pre-determine whether or not “non-reach” will occur and perform a pre-reading notice effect.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 sends one of the presentation control commands (display result 1 designation to display result 5 designation) (see FIG. 13) according to the determined big hit type, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S118. When the big hit flag is set, if the type of the big hit is “normal big hit”, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command (steps S111 and S112). Whether or not it is “ordinary big hit” can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. . Further, when the big hit type is “probability big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). Whether or not it is “probable big hit” can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “02”. . When neither “normal big hit” nor “probability big hit” (that is, “sudden probability big hit”), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designation command (step S115).

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command (step S117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in Step S116), that is, when it is out of place, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (Step S118).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S119).

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step S1125). When the variation time timer times out (step S1126), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol determination designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. (Step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process is terminated.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56, if it is set, the high probability flag indicating the probability variation state (high probability state) or the high probability flag indicating the short time state (high base state). The base flag, a high base number counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the short time state (high base state) is reset (step S132). The CPU 56 transmits a big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 when the big hit type is a normal big hit or a probable change big hit, and when the big hit type is a sudden big hit, the small hit / sudden probability change. A jackpot start designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S133). The jackpot type is determined by data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer).

  In addition, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (a time for which the effect display device 9 notifies that the jackpot has occurred, for example) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step S134). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 15) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S135). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-payment opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S136).

  When it is confirmed in step S131 that the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 sets the value of the high base number counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time-short state (high base state) to 0. It is confirmed whether or not (step S137). If the value of the high base number counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S145. When the value of the high base number counter is not 0 (that is, when the low probability / high base state is controlled after finishing the big hit game based on the normal big hit), the CPU 56 sets the value of the high base number counter to- 1 (step S138). Then, when the value of the high base number counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the high base flag (step S140). Then, the process proceeds to step S145.

  In step S145, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set. If the small hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S150. If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a small hit / suddenly probable big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S146). Also, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time for notifying that the small hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the special winning opening control timer (step S147). Further, the number of times of opening (specifically, twice) is set in the number of times of opening counter (step S148). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308) (step S149).

  In step S150, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S162). In step S162, the CPU 56 transmits a big hit end designation command (command A301 (H)) when the big hit type is a normal big hit or a probable variation big hit, and when the big hit type is a sudden probable big hit. A small hit / suddenly probable big hit end designation command (command A302 (H)) is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed in the image display device 9 (the big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  When the big hit end display time has elapsed, the CPU 56 sets the high base flag and shifts to the short time state (high base state) if the big hit type is the normal big hit (step S166). (Step S167). That is, after the big hit game based on the normal big hit, the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / high base state. Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times) in the high base number counter (step S168). The jackpot type is determined by data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer).

  If it is not a normal big hit, the CPU 56 sets a high probability flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S169). Next, if the type of big hit is a probable big hit (step S170), the CPU 56 sets the high base flag and shifts to the time-short state (high base state) (step S171). That is, after the big hit game based on the probability variation big hit, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / high base state. On the other hand, if it is not a probable big hit (that is, if the big hit type is suddenly probable big hit), the process proceeds to step S172 without executing step S171. That is, after the big hit game based on the sudden probability change big hit, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / low base state. The jackpot type is determined by data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer).

  In this embodiment, the high base flag set in the processing of steps S167 and S171 is also used to determine whether or not to increase the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. The high base flag is used to determine whether or not to shorten the special symbol variation time.

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S172).

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. In the main process, the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S701). .

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 executes a random number update process for updating the counter value of a counter for generating a predetermined random number (step S702). Then, the timer interrupt flag is monitored (step S703). If the timer interrupt flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S702. When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S704), and executes the effect control process of steps S705 to S708.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S705).

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands. (Formed in RAM). A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 analyzes which command (see FIGS. 13 to 17) is the effect control command stored in the command reception buffer.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S706). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the normal symbol is 0 (step S707). If the value of the normal symbol variation time timer is not 0, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the normal symbol variation time timer (step S708).

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 13 and FIG. 14) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is. The interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 2 ms.

  36 to 39 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis processing (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer (pointer indicating from which area in the command reception buffer the command should be read) is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  When the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). . Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616A).

  Further, the production control CPU 101 stops displaying the customer waiting demonstration screen (customer waiting demonstration screen) on the production display device 9 (step S616B). At this time, the customer waiting demonstration screen may not be displayed, but in this case, the process of step S616B is not executed.

  When the received effect control command is a display result specifying command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result specifying command (display result 1 specifying command to display result 6 specifying command) in the RAM. The display result designation command storage area is stored (step S618).

  When the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmation command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (step S625), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S626). Also, the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is reset. If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (step S627), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S628). Further, the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is reset.

  When the received effect control command is a special winning opening open designation command (step S631), the effect control CPU 101 sets a special winning opening open flag (step S632). Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received special winning opening open designation command in the special winning opening open designated command storage area formed in the RAM (step S633). The production control microcomputer 100 recognizes the number of rounds during the big hit game by confirming the special winning opening open designated command stored in the special winning opening open designated command storage area. Can do.

  When the received effect control command is a designation command after opening the big prize opening (step S635), the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag after opening the big prize opening (step S636). Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received special winning opening after opening designation command in the designated winning opening after opening special command storage area formed in the RAM (step S637).

  If the received effect control command is a low probability / low base state background designation command (step S638), the effect control CPU 101 resets the high base state flag if set (step S639). Further, the effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen (for example, a blue display color background screen) corresponding to the low probability / low base state (step S640).

  If the received effect control command is a low probability / high base state background designation command (step S641), the effect control CPU 101 resets the probability variation state flag if set and sets the high base state flag. (Step S642). Further, the effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen corresponding to the low probability / high base state (for example, a background screen with a green display color) (step S643).

  If the received effect control command is a high probability / low base state background designation command (step S644), the effect control CPU 101 resets the high base state flag and sets the probability variation state flag if set. (Step S645). Further, the effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen corresponding to the high probability / low base state (for example, a yellow display color background screen) (step S646).

  When the received effect control command is a high probability / high base state background designation command (step S647), the effect control CPU 101 sets a probability change state flag and a high base state flag (step S648). Further, the effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen (for example, a red display color background screen) corresponding to the high probability / high base state (step S649).

  The case where the high probability / low base state background designation command is received in step S644 is a case where a sudden probability variation big hit occurs and the high probability / low base state is controlled. In this case, the background screen corresponding to the high probability / low base state displayed in step S646 may be a so-called probability variation latent background screen. For example, even if a small hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, whether or not the sudden change suddenly occurs and is controlled to a high probability state by changing to the same background screen for probability variation latent May be configured to be unrecognizable.

  When the received effect control command is the first start prize designation command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received first start prize designation command as the first start prize command formed in the RAM. Store in the first free storage area (step S652). If the received effect control command is the second start winning designation command (step S651), it is stored in the first free storage area of the second start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step S652). ).

  FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a start winning command storage area (a first starting winning command storage area, a second starting winning command storage area). As shown in FIG. 40, areas (storage areas 1 to 4) corresponding to the maximum values (4 in this example) of the respective reserved storage numbers are secured in the respective start winning command storage areas.

  When there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 in the processing of steps S1219 to S1221, S1229 to S1231 in the start opening switch passing processing shown in FIG. In the process, the start prize designation command (first start prize designation command or second start prize designation command), symbol designation command, and variable category command command are transmitted substantially collectively, as shown in FIG. In addition, in each of the storage areas 1 to 4 of the start winning command storage area, a storage area is secured so that the start winning designation command, the symbol designation command, and the variation category command are stored in association with each other.

  FIG. 40 illustrates a state in which four start winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, and variation category commands are stored in the respective start winning command storage areas.

  If the received effect control command is any symbol designation command (step S653), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received symbol designation command in the first free storage area of the start winning command storage area. Store (step S654).

  When the received effect control command is any variation category command (step S655), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation category command in the first storage area that is free in the start winning command storage area. Store (step S656).

  When the start winning designation command received immediately before is the first starting winning designation command in the processing of steps S654 and S656, the effect control CPU 101 receives the symbol designation command and the variable category command at the time of the first starting prize. When the start winning designation command stored in the command storage area and received immediately before is the second start winning designation command, the symbol designation command and the variation category command are stored in the second start winning prize command storage area.

  When the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number addition designation command or the second reserved memory number addition designation command (step S657), the effect control CPU 101 determines the value of the first reserved memory number counter or the second The value of the reserved storage number counter is incremented by 1 (step S658). The effect control CPU 101 also displays the first reserved memory number on the first reserved memory display unit 18c (when the first reserved memory number addition designation command is received) or the second reserved memory display unit 18d on the second reserved memory display unit 18d. The display of the storage number (when the second reserved storage number addition designation command is received) is updated (step S659). Specifically, the display number is increased by one. The first reserved memory number counter and the second reserved memory number counter are formed in the RAM.

  When the received effect control command is a customer waiting demonstration designation command (step S668), the effect control CPU 101 starts displaying a predetermined customer waiting demonstration screen on the effect display device 9 (step S669). .

  When the received effect control command is a normal symbol variation start specifying command (step S671), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received normal symbol variation start specifying command in the normal symbol variation start specifying command provided in the RAM. Store in the area (step S672). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag (step S673) and sets a normal symbol variation flag indicating that the variation of the normal symbol is being displayed (step S674).

  In step S673, when receiving the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command, the effect control CPU 101 sets the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command reception flag, and sets the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command. When it is received, the normal symbol variation start designation (offset) command reception flag is set.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds to the normal symbol variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the ordinary symbol (step S675).

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the low base state, the variation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds, and when the gaming state is the high base state, the variation time of the normal symbol is 1.5 seconds. However, in step S675, a value corresponding to 10 seconds is uniformly set in the normal symbol variation time timer regardless of the gaming state. Even if a value corresponding to 10 seconds is uniformly set, in this embodiment, control is performed so that the predetermined effect described later is not performed when the high base state is set, so that troubles occur with respect to execution of the predetermined effect. There is no. In the high base state, the normal symbol change time timer value is reset by receiving the normal symbol change end designation command when the normal symbol change display ends after 1.5 seconds. (See step S677). In step S675, it is confirmed whether or not the high base state is set (specifically, it is checked whether or not the high base state flag is set). May be set to a value corresponding to 10 seconds, and in the high base state, a value corresponding to 1.5 seconds may be set to the normal symbol variation time timer.

  When the received effect control command is a normal symbol change end designation command (step S676), the effect control CPU 101 resets the normal symbol changing flag and the normal symbol change time timer (step S677). .

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S690). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing random numbers used by the production control microcomputer 100. As shown in FIG. 41, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 includes random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, a random number SR3 for determining a predetermined effect, and a background effect. The random number for determination SR4 and the random number SR6 for determining the look-ahead notice effect are used. Note that random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the effect.

  The random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols are “left”, “middle”, “in” in the display area of the effect display device 9 as stop symbols that are variable display results of decorative symbols. This is a random number used to determine a decorative symbol (final stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed in each “right” symbol display area. The final stop symbols are three decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends. The combination of the big hit symbols of the decorative symbols is determined by any one of the random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols.

  The predetermined effect determining random number SR3 is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the predetermined effect.

  The background effect determination random number SR4 is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the background effect.

  The pre-reading notice effect determining random number SR6 is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a first predetermined effect process (step S810A), a second predetermined effect process (step S810B), and a prefetch notice effect determination process (step S810C).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled to realize variable display of decorative symbols, but control related to variable display of decorative symbols synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to variable display of decorative symbols synchronized with changes in special symbols is also executed in one effect control process. The decorative display variable display synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the decorative display variable display synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is executed depending on which effect control process processing is performed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801).

  Decoration symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the ornament symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol changing process (step S802).

  Decoration symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Decoration symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the ornament symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. If the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an execution section of a predetermined effect. The “predetermined effect” is controlled to determine whether or not the reach effect is executed in the variation display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol, or the variable winning ball device 15 is in a state where the game ball can easily enter (pass) (for example, open state). It is an effect that informs whether or not it is performed. In this embodiment, it may be notified that a predetermined type of hit (for example, a small hit) is made in a predetermined effect. In this embodiment, in a predetermined effect, an effect of a mode in which the roulette is rotated on the display screen of the effect display device 9 is executed. Note that it is not always necessary to notify that the 100% reach effect is executed in the predetermined effect, or to notify that the 100% variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter. Notification that suggests the possibility of the performance being performed, or notification that suggests that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 may be controlled to a state in which the game ball is likely to enter may be performed. Further, the predetermined effect is executed by the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In the example shown in FIG. 43, the predetermined effect is executed in the order of the sign effect, the start effect, the notification effect, and the result notification effect. The period in which the sign effect is executed is referred to as a first period, and the period in which the start effect, the notification effect, and the result notification effect are executed is referred to as a second period.

  Also, the execution of the first period effect (predictive effect) may be omitted. In addition, the period of the result notification effect may be shortened.

  The sign effect is an effect that reminds the player that the predetermined effect is started. The start effect is an effect for causing the player to recognize that the predetermined effect has started. The notification effect is an effect that causes the player to expect the variable winning ball apparatus 15 to be controlled so that the game ball can easily enter. The result notification effect is an effect that allows the player to recall whether or not the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter.

  In addition, it is desirable to provide a case where after the indication effect of the first period is executed, it does not develop into an effect after the start effect of the second period (in this example, a roulette effect). By doing so, not only the expectation that roulette and other effects may be performed, but also the anxiety that it may not necessarily develop into roulette and other effects are performed. It is possible to enhance the effect of the indication effect.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the presence or type of the predetermined effect is determined and triggered by the start of the variable symbol display, the special symbol or the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In some cases, the presence or type of a predetermined effect is determined and the predetermined effect is executed in response to the start of. Hereinafter, in this embodiment, the predetermined effect that is executed by the determination process triggered by the start of the normal symbol variation display is referred to as a “first predetermined effect”, and the start of the special symbol or decorative symbol variation display is started. There is a case where a predetermined effect that is executed when the determination process is performed as an opportunity is referred to as a “second predetermined effect”.

  44 to 46 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of the predetermined effect. FIG. 44 illustrates an effect for notifying that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter. FIG. 45 illustrates an effect for notifying that a predetermined type of hit (in this example, a small hit) is made. FIG. 46 illustrates an effect for notifying that a reach effect (normal reach effect or super reach effect) is executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 44 (A) to 46 (A), the variation of the decorative symbol is started from the state where the variation (variable display) of the left middle right decorative symbol is stopped in the effect display device 9 ( (See FIGS. 44B to 46B). At that time, display control is performed such that the character image 9a displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 moves. The effect by such display control corresponds to the sign effect.

  Next, control for displaying a notification image (for example, an image displaying “roulette chance”) 9b, which is an image for an effect as if a predetermined effect is started, is executed (FIG. 44C to FIG. 44). 46 (C)). The effect by such display control corresponds to the start effect. Then, the notification effect is started.

  In this embodiment, the notification effect is an effect in which the symbol fluctuates in the effect area 9F (an effect in a form in which the roulette rotates) (see FIGS. 44D to 46D).

  Thereafter, if the variable winning ball device 15 is to notify that the game ball is easily controlled to enter, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to easily enter the game ball in the effect area 9F. The image 9c suggesting this is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 44E). Next, a notification image 9d is displayed to notify that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter (see FIG. 44F). Thereafter, the effect display device 9 displays an image 9e that clearly indicates that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter (open state) (see FIG. 44F). Note that a period during which display control as shown in FIGS. 44E and 44F is performed corresponds to a period of result notification effect.

  Further, if it is a notification that a predetermined type of hit (in this example, a small hit) is to be notified, it is suggested that a predetermined type of hit (in this example, a small hit) is made in the effect area 9F. The image 9f is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 45E). Next, a notification image 9g that displays the occurrence of a predetermined type of hit is displayed (see FIG. 45F). Thereafter, the effect display device 9 displays an image 9h that clearly indicates that the special winning opening is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter (open state) (see FIG. 45F).

  Further, in the case of notifying that a reach effect (normal reach effect or super reach effect) is to be executed, in the effect area 9F, an image that suggests reaching (in order to notify that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high). ) 9i is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 46E). In the example shown in FIG. 46, an image including the character string “extreme heat” is shown as the image 9i that suggests reaching, but in this embodiment, the image that indicates reaching is reached. There are two types of images: an image including a character string of “extreme heat” and an image including a character string of “chance”. In this embodiment, in the case of super reach, the image including the character string of “hot” is stopped and displayed as compared with the image including the character string of “chance” compared to the case of normal reach. The ratio is high. Then, the display state of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state (see FIG. 46F). Thereafter, an image 9j that clearly indicates the occurrence of super reach is displayed on the effect display device 9 (see FIG. 46F).

  In addition, the effect mode of the predetermined effect is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and for example, the reach effect is executed, and the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in a state where the game ball can easily enter (pass). The notification effect is not executed, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not controlled to be in a state in which the game ball is likely to enter (pass) easily (i.e., a notification result of the loss). The “predetermined effect” may be executed.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example in the case where a predetermined effect for notifying the result of the outage is executed before notifying that the reach effect is executed as another example of the predetermined effect. In the other example shown in FIG. 47, once the reach effect is not executed in the effect area 9F, the variable winning ball device 15 is not controlled so that the game ball can easily enter (pass) (indication result of the loss). The image 9k to be displayed is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 47E). Next, the effect for the notification is again performed in the effect area 9F, and the effect that the effect for the notification is started again is executed (see FIG. 47F). Thereafter, in the effect area 9F, an image (image for informing that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high) 9i that suggests reaching is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 47G).

  48 to 50 are flowcharts showing the first predetermined effect process (step S810A). In the first predetermined effect process, the predetermined effect is started when a predetermined condition is met, triggered by the start of the normal symbol variation display.

  In the first predetermined effect process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a first predetermined effect executing flag indicating that the first predetermined effect is being executed is set (step S731). If the first predetermined effect executing flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the second predetermined effect executing flag indicating that the second predetermined effect is being executed is set ( Step S732). If the second predetermined effect execution flag is set, the process is terminated. If the second predetermined effect execution flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S741.

  When the first predetermined effect execution flag is set in step S731 (that is, when the first predetermined effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 101 measures the effect period of the first predetermined effect. The value of the first predetermined effect timer for this is -1 (step S734). Then, when the value of the first predetermined effect timer becomes 0 (step S735), the first predetermined effect is ended (step S736). Further, the effect control CPU 101 resets the first predetermined effect executing flag (step S737).

  In step S741, the effect control CPU 101 is set with a next variation flag (a flag indicating that it is determined to execute the first predetermined effect during the variation of the special symbol and the decorative symbol to be started next). Check if it is. If the next fluctuation flag is set, the process proceeds to step S761.

  When the next variation flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 is operating the non-variable period measurement timer (a timer for measuring a period during which the variation (variable display) of special symbols and decorative symbols is not started). It is confirmed whether it is (not 0) (step S742). If the non-change period measurement timer is not operating, the process proceeds to step S751. Since the change of the special symbol and the change of the decorative symbol are synchronized, the following description will be made taking the change of the special symbol as an example.

  When the non-change period measurement timer is operating, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the special symbol change has started (step S743). Whether or not the variation of the special symbol is started is determined, for example, based on whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process or the decorative symbol variation process. When the change of the special symbol is started, the process proceeds to step S771.

  When the change of the special symbol is not started, the CPU 101 for effect control decreases the value of the non-change period measurement timer by −1 (step S744). When the value of the non-change period measurement timer becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S771 (step S745). If the value of the non-change period measurement timer is not 0, the process is terminated.

  In step S751, the effect control CPU 101 receives a normal symbol variation start designation command indicating that a normal symbol variation start designation command (ordinary symbol variation start designation (hit) command or normal symbol variation start designation (disconnection) command) has been received. It is confirmed whether or not the flag (ordinary symbol variation start designation (hit) command reception flag or ordinary symbol variation start designation (out)) command reception flag) is set. If it is not set, the process is terminated.

  When the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the high base state is set (whether or not the high base state flag is set) (step S752). . If it is in the high base state, the process is terminated.

  If it is not in the high base state, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the big hit gaming state (including the small hit gaming state) (step S753). Whether or not the game state is a big hit gaming state is confirmed, for example, by the value of the effect control process flag. In this case, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 101 is in the big hit gaming state when the value of the effect control process flag is 4 or more. If it is a big hit gaming state, the process is terminated.

  When it is not the big hit game state, the CPU 101 for effect control stores whether or not a symbol designation command (design 6 designation command: see FIG. 15) corresponding to the small win is stored in the start winning storage area (see FIG. 40). (Step S754). If the symbol designation command corresponding to the small hit is stored, the process is terminated.

  If the symbol designation command corresponding to the small hit is not stored, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S755). Whether or not the special symbol is changing is determined, for example, based on whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol changing process or the decorative symbol change stopping process. When the special symbol is not changing, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not one minute or more has passed since the change of the special symbol is finished (step S757).

  For example, the determination process of step S757 is realized by preparing a timer for measuring the time after the change of the special symbol is completed and checking the measurement value of the timer. If one minute or more has passed since the change of the special symbol is finished, the process is finished. When the time since the change of the special symbol is less than 1 minute, the process proceeds to step S759.

  Also, ending the processing when one minute or more has passed since the change of the special symbol has taken into consideration that the player will continue playing for a while after the change of the special symbol has ended. Because. In other words, in this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the low base state is 10 seconds (see FIG. 19), and the upper limit value of the number of gate passing memories (ordinary symbol holding number) is 4, so [4 × This is because it is considered better to execute the process of step S759 until a time slightly longer than [10 seconds] elapses.

  Further, in this embodiment, since step S759 may be executed when the answer is N in step S752, and the first predetermined effect may be executed, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is executed in the low base state. An informing means for informing that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state when the open state is reached is realized. Then, by executing Steps S755 and S757, if one minute or more has elapsed since the last special symbol variation display was completed, notification that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state is limited. The In this embodiment, if more than one minute has passed since the last special symbol variation display has ended, the customer waiting demonstration display after the last special symbol variation display has also been terminated. To do. Therefore, in this embodiment, by executing steps S755 and S757, a notification limiting unit for limiting notification by the notification unit after the customer waiting demonstration display is completed is realized.

  When the special symbol is changing, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not a predetermined time (11.5 in this example) has elapsed since the start of the change (step S758). If the predetermined time has elapsed, the process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, when the decoration pattern change (variable display) is executed by the change pattern in which the super reach effect is executed, the super reach effect is started after 11.5 seconds from the start of the change.

  If the predetermined time has not elapsed, the CPU 101 for effect control determines the presence and type of the first predetermined effect (step S759). Then, control goes to a step S764. Note that the elapsed time from the start of change is determined, for example, based on the value of the change time timer (see FIGS. 58 and 63).

  In step S759, the effect control CPU 101 determines, for example, the presence and type of the first predetermined effect (which notification result is to be used) using the first predetermined effect determination table shown in FIG.

  In the first predetermined effect determination table shown in FIG. 51, when the display result of the normal symbol is changed to the off symbol (corresponding to the case where the normal symbol change start designation (off) command reception flag is set) and the display of the normal symbol In accordance with each of cases where the result is a winning symbol (equivalent to the case where the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command reception flag is set), a determination value corresponding to not executing the predetermined effect, and the predetermined effect The determination value corresponding to executing (×), the determination value corresponding to executing the predetermined effect (◯), and the determination corresponding to executing the predetermined effect (○) after the predetermined effect (×) Value is set. The predetermined effect (×) is a predetermined effect for notifying that the reach effect is not executed and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not controlled so that the game ball easily enters (passes) (notification result of the loss). The predetermined effect (◯) is a predetermined effect for notifying that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled so that the game ball easily enters (passes). In the first predetermined effect determination table, at least a determination value corresponding to executing the predetermined effect may be set. FIG. 51 shows the number of determination values, not the determination value itself.

  51 may be used in place of the “notification content” (predetermined effect) mode shown in FIG. 51 or in addition to the “notification content” mode shown in FIG. For example, a patrol (emergency red light) -like image that is generally used for notifying the probability change, a character image used in a step-up notice effect for notifying the display result of a special symbol, or a jackpot notice An image or the like may be used as another aspect. In the case of using them, an effect in which a certain effect is linked with a certain effect is realized, such as a probability change confirmation notification, a step-up notification effect, a jackpot notification, and the like.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 51, even if it is the case of the normal figure, it is configured so that the predetermined effect may not be executed at a low rate of 10%. The predetermined effect may be executed at a rate of 100%.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts a predetermined effect determination random number (see FIG. 41) in the process of step S759, and when the predetermined effect determination random number matches one of the determination values corresponding to the execution of the predetermined effect. Then, it is decided to execute a predetermined effect. When the normal symbol variation start designation (out of) command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 uses the determination value relating to “ordinary symbol outage” in the first predetermined effect determination table, and the normal symbol variation When the start designation (hit) command reception flag is set, the determination value relating to “per normal symbol” in the first predetermined effect determination table is used. It should be noted that by checking the normal symbol variation start designation command stored in the normal symbol variation start designation command storage area (see step S672), it is determined whether or not it is per ordinary symbol. The determination value related to “regular symbol” may be used, and the determination value related to “regular symbol deviation” may be used if it is not per common symbol.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 resets the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag when executing the process of step S759. The effect control CPU 101 also resets the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag if the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag is set even when it is determined as “Y” in step S733. The effect control CPU 101 also sets the normal symbol variation start designation command that has been set even if the process has not shifted to the process of step S759 due to the determination of “Y” in steps S752, S753, S754, S757, and S758. Reset the reception flag.

  In step S <b> 761, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the special symbol change has started. Whether or not the change of the special symbol has been started is determined by, for example, the value of the effect control process flag. When the variation of the special symbol has not started, the value of the effect shortening timer (timer for determining the degree of shortening the effect period of the predetermined effect) is incremented by 1 (step S762). When the change of the special symbol is started, the process proceeds to step S771.

  In step S764, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not it is determined to execute the first predetermined effect. Note that it is determined to execute the first predetermined effect in the process of step S759. If it is not decided to execute the first predetermined effect, the process ends.

  When it is determined to execute the first predetermined effect, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S765). Whether or not the special symbol is changing is determined, for example, based on whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol changing process or the decorative symbol change stopping process. If the special symbol is not changing, the process proceeds to step S770. If the special symbol is changing, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the change pattern is not reachable (step S766). If the variation pattern includes a reach effect, the process proceeds to step S771.

  When the variation pattern is a deviation that does not reach, the effect control CPU 101 normally has the remaining time of variation of the special symbol (for example, specified by the value of the variation time timer shown in FIGS. 58 and 63). It is confirmed whether or not it is shorter than the symbol variation time (for example, 10 seconds: equivalent to a period until the variable winning ball apparatus is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter) (step S767). If not shorter, the process proceeds to step S771. The effect control CPU 101 may confirm whether or not the remaining time of the variation of the special symbol is shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) shorter than the variation time of the normal symbol.

  When the remaining time of the change of the special symbol is short, the production control CPU 101 has a hold memory (at least one of the value of the first hold memory number counter and the value of the second hold memory number counter is not 0). Whether or not (step S768). If there is no pending storage, the process proceeds to step S771.

  If there is an on-hold storage, the effect control CPU 101 sets the next fluctuation flag (step S769).

  In step S770, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) in the non-change period measurement timer.

  In step S771, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the next fluctuation flag is set. If the next fluctuation flag is set, a predetermined effect pattern corresponding to the value of the effect shortening timer (see steps S741, S761, S762) is selected (step S772). Specifically, the pattern of the predetermined effect is determined as a pattern in which the period obtained by subtracting the value of the effect shortening timer from the period of the predetermined effect shown in FIG. The shortened period is a result notification effect period shown in FIG.

  If the next fluctuation flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the non-change period measurement timer (see steps S742, S743, and S744) is 0 (step S773). . When the value of the non-change period measurement timer is not 0, the effect control CPU 101 selects a predetermined effect pattern according to the value of the non-change period measurement timer (step S774). Specifically, the pattern of the predetermined effect is determined as a pattern in which the period obtained by subtracting the value of the non-change period measurement timer from the period of the predetermined effect shown in FIG. 43 is the effect period. The shortened period is a period of the result notification effect shown in FIG.

  If the value of the non-change period measurement timer is 0 (the non-change period measurement timer has timed out), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S775). ). When the special symbol is changing, the CPU 101 for effect control selects a predetermined effect pattern starting from the second period (see FIG. 43) (step S776). If the special symbol is not changing, the CPU 101 for effect control selects a predetermined effect pattern starting from the first period (see FIG. 43) (step S777).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the time corresponding to the determined predetermined effect pattern in the first predetermined effect timer (step S778). Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the first predetermined effect (step S779) and sets the first predetermined effect executing flag (step S780).

  Note that when the first predetermined effect execution flag is set, information that can specify the notification result of the first predetermined effect is also set. In this case, for example, a flag indicating that the notification result is “X”, a flag indicating that the notification result is “◯”, and execution of the predetermined effect (◯) after the predetermined effect (×). A flag may be set. For example, when the first predetermined effect execution flag is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), a value that specifies which notification result is a predetermined bit of the first predetermined effect execution flag It may be possible to specify which notification result is set by setting.

  In this embodiment, specifically, the first predetermined effect is realized by executing effect control according to data set in a process table described later. In that case, the CPU 101 for effect control selects the process table according to the determined pattern of the predetermined effect in the process of step S779, and the effect display device 9 using the data set in the selected process table. Start display control etc. Each process table is stored in the ROM in advance.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the second predetermined effect process (step S810B). In the second predetermined effect prefetching process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a new variation category command has been received (step S5201). When the new variation category command is received, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the first predetermined effect executing flag is set (step S5202). If the first predetermined effect execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the second predetermined effect execution flag is set (step S5203). If the second predetermined effect execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the second predetermined effect determination flag indicating that the execution of the second predetermined effect is determined is set. (Step S5204).

  If the second predetermined effect determination flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the next variation flag is set (step S5205). If the next fluctuation flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the non-change period measurement timer is operating (not 0) (step S5206).

  When the non-change period measurement timer is not operating, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the game state data is in the high base state (step S5207). If it is in the high base state, the process is terminated.

  If it is not in the high base state, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the big hit gaming state (including the small hit gaming state) (step S5208). Whether or not the game state is a big hit gaming state is confirmed, for example, by the value of the effect control process flag. In this case, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 101 is in the big hit gaming state when the value of the effect control process flag is 4 or more. If it is a big hit gaming state, the process is terminated.

  If it is not a big hit gaming state, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the variation pattern type indicated by the newly received variation category command indicates a super reach loss or a super reach big hit determination result (step S5209). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not a variation category 8 command, a variation category 10 command, a variation category 12 command, a variation category 23 command or a variation category 26 command (see FIGS. 16 and 17) has been received.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 uses the second predetermined effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the second predetermined effect as a winning determination result (superreach loss or super reach jackpot) and the total number of reserved storage (first A predetermined effect determination table is selected according to the sum of the number of the first reserved memory and the number of the second reserved memory (step S5210).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence / absence and type of the second predetermined effect using the second predetermined effect determination table selected in step S5210 (step S5211).

  FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram of a second predetermined effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 53, in this embodiment, in the second predetermined effect determination table, a determination value corresponding to not executing the predetermined effect in association with the determination result at the time of winning and the total number of pending storages, and the predetermined effect A determination value corresponding to executing (×), a determination value corresponding to executing a predetermined effect (chance), and a determination value corresponding to executing a predetermined effect (extreme heat) are set. Yes.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 53, in this embodiment, when the super reach hit is large, a predetermined effect (glow heat) with the highest expectation for reach effect is obtained compared to the case where super reach is lost. While being determined at a high rate, the execution rate of the predetermined effect (severe heat) increases as the total number of reserved storage increases.

  Further, when it is determined that the second predetermined effect is to be executed, the effect control CPU 101 sets a second predetermined effect determination flag (steps S5213 and S5214).

  When the second predetermined effect determination flag is set, information that can specify the notification result of the second predetermined effect is also stored in the RAM. As an example, a flag indicating that the notification result is “x”, a flag indicating that the notification result is “chance”, and a flag indicating that the notification result is “hot” are set. Also, for example, when the second predetermined effect determination flag is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), a value that specifies which notification result is set in the predetermined bit of the second predetermined effect determination flag. By doing so, it may be possible to specify which notification result is given.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 sets the total pending storage number in the first variation counter (step S5215). Note that the first variation number counter is a counter for counting the number of variation displays executed until the variation display including the second predetermined effect is started. In this embodiment, when the execution of the second predetermined effect is determined during the variation display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the first variation counter is set in step S5215, the execution is first performed. At the end of the middle variation display, the value of the first variation number counter is decremented by 1 (see step S8312). As a result, the first variation number counter counts up to the variation display immediately before the variation display including the second predetermined effect. The value becomes 0. In step S5215, if the variation of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current total number of pending storages in the first variation counter. Is desirable. With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure that the value of the first variation counter becomes 0 until the variation display immediately before the variation display including the second predetermined effect.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing pre-reading notice effect determination processing (step S810C). In the pre-reading notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a new start prize command (design designation command, variation category command, start prize designation command) has been received (step S6001). Whether or not a new start winning command has been received is specifically determined based on whether the new command is stored in the first start winning command storage area or the second start winning command storage area (see FIG. 40). It can be determined by confirming whether or not it has been done. If a new start winning command has not been received, the process ends.

  If a new start winning command has been received, the effect control CPU 101 prefetching notice flag indicating that execution of the prefetching notice effect has been decided or prefetching notice indicating that the prefetch notice effect is being executed. It is checked whether or not the executing flag is set (step S6002). If the prefetching notice determination flag or the prefetching notice execution flag is set, the process is terminated as it is. By executing the process of step S6002, in this embodiment, when the pre-reading notice effect has already been determined or when the pre-reading notice effect is being executed, the pre-reading notice effect determination process is repeated. I do not do it. In addition, when the pre-reading notice effect is determined or being executed with respect to the hold memory in which the determination result at the time of winning is out of place (that is, when the so-called “gase pre-reading notice effect has been decided or being executed), a new In the case where the stored storage generated in step S1 is a big hit, the process may proceed to step S6003 and subsequent steps to determine the prefetching notice effect, and the prefetched notice effect that has been determined or being executed may be replaced.

  If neither the prefetching notice determination flag or the prefetching notice execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether the probability change state flag or the high base flag is set (step S6003). If the probability variation state flag or the high base flag is set, the processing is terminated as it is. By executing the processing of step S6003, in this embodiment, only when the gaming state is the low probability / low base state, the process proceeds to the processing after step S6004 and the prefetching notice effect can be executed.

  If neither the probability variation state flag nor the high base state flag is set (that is, if the low probability / low base state), the effect control CPU 56 determines that the newly received start winning designation command is the first starting winning designation. It is confirmed whether it is a command (step S6004). Whether or not the newly received start winning designation command is the first start winning designation command is, specifically, whether the first start winning designation command is newly stored in the first start winning command storage area. It can be determined by checking whether or not. If it is not the first start winning designation command (that is, if it is the second start winning designation command), the processing is ended as it is. By executing the processing of step S6004, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a pre-reading notice effect only for the first reserved memory as a notice object. In addition to the first hold memory, the second hold memory may be configured to execute a pre-reading notice effect as a notice object.

  If the newly received start winning designation command is the first start winning designation command, a prefetch notice effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the prefetch notice effect according to the determination result at the time of winning and the current first reserved storage number. Is selected (step S6005). Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on the selected prefetching notice effect determination table and the prefetching notice effect determination random number SR6, and determines whether to execute the prefetching notice effect (step S6006). Specifically, whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect is extracted according to the determination value (the determination value set in the pre-reading notice effect determination table) that matches the random number value by extracting the random number SR6 for determining the pre-reading notice effect. decide.

  FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram of a prefetch notice effect determination table. In the prefetch notice effect determination table, a determination value corresponding to not executing the prefetch notice effect and a determination value corresponding to executing the prefetch notice effect are set. Note that either the determination value corresponding to not executing the prefetching notice effect or the determination value corresponding to executing the prefetching notice effect may be set in the prefetching notice effect determination table.

  In step S6005, the production control CPU 101 first specifies whether the winning determination result is “out of”, “normal big hit”, or “probability big hit” based on the newly received symbol designation command. Specifically, if the symbol designation command newly stored in the first start winning prize command storage area is the symbol 1 designation command, the winning determination result is identified as “out of”, and the symbol 2 designation command If the winning determination result is “ordinary jackpot”, the symbol 3 designation command specifies that the winning determination result is “probable big hit”. In this embodiment, when the winning determination result is “suddenly promising big hit” or “small win”, it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is not executed as it is, and the processing is ended. Note that the pre-reading notice effect may be executed even when the determination result at the time of winning is “suddenly promising big hit” or “small win”.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 specifies the current first reserved memory number. Specifically, the CPU 101 for effect control identifies the current first reserved memory number by checking the value of the first reserved memory number counter (see step S658). Then, the effect control CPU 101 selects a table corresponding to the specified winning determination result and the first reserved memory number from the prefetch notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 55, and based on the prefetch notice effect determination random number SR6. A lottery process is performed, and it is determined whether or not a prefetch notice effect is to be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 55, in this embodiment, when the winning determination result is “ordinary big hit” or “probability big hit”, the pre-reading is compared with the case where the winning determination result is “out of place”. The execution ratio of the notice effect is high. Therefore, in this embodiment, the anticipation for the big hit can be enhanced by executing the pre-reading notice effect. Further, in this embodiment, when the winning determination result is “probability big hit”, the pre-reading notice effect execution rate is higher than when the winning determination result is “normal big hit”. It has become. For this reason, in this embodiment, by performing the pre-reading notice effect, it is possible to further increase the expectation for the probable big hit.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 55, in this embodiment, when the winning determination result is “ordinary big hit” or “probability big hit”, the pre-reading notice effect is executed as the number of the first reserved storage numbers increases. If the ratio is high and the determination result at the time of winning is “out of”, the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice effect decreases as the number of the first reserved storage numbers increases. In this embodiment, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed, the pre-reading notice effect starts to be executed from the first variable display after the start winning of the reserved storage for the notice object occurs. The pre-reading notice effect is continued until the change display one time before the change display for the reserved storage. Therefore, when the first reserved memory number is 2, the pre-reading notice effect is executed in one change before the change display of the notice object, and when the first reserved memory number is 3, the change in the notice object is performed. The pre-reading notice effect is executed over two variations before display, and if the first reserved memory number is 4, the pre-reading notice effect is executed over three changes before the change display of the notice target (first reserved memory). When the number is 1, since there is no change before the change display for the reserved memory to be notified, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed). Therefore, in this embodiment, the expectation for the big hit increases as the number of executions of the prefetch notice effect increases, and the expectation for the “probable big hit” increases as the number of executions of the prefetch notice effect increases.

  It should be noted that the “prefetching notice effect” is a notice effect that is executed before the variable display to be noticed is started. In this embodiment, the production starts from the variation display that is started after the start winning for the variation display to be notified is generated, and one or more times until the variation display immediately before the variation display to be notified. The pre-reading notice effect is executed in the variable display, but the pre-reading notice effect is executed only in any one of the variable displays before the variable display to be noticed. Also good. Further, in this embodiment, the notice effect is ended until the change display immediately before the change display to be notified, but the pre-read notification effect may be performed over the change display to be the notification target. In addition, it is not always necessary to continuously perform the display over a plurality of times of change display. For example, the pre-reading notice effect may be executed in a variable display of a plurality of times intermittently every other time or every second time.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the pre-reading notice effect is started from the first variable display that is started after the start prize is generated for the variable display subject to the notice in advance. It may be configured to adjust the start timing of the prefetching notice effect, such as starting the prefetching notice effect from the second variation display or the third variation display that is started after the occurrence of the occurrence. In this case, for example, it is configured to adjust the execution period of the pre-reading notice effect by adjusting the start timing of the pre-reading notice effect according to whether it is “probable big hit”, “normal big hit”, or “out of line”. May be. Specifically, for example, when a pre-reading notice effect is executed with the fourth reserved memory as a notice object, the execution timing of the pre-reading notice effect is determined according to the winning determination result of the fourth reserved memory. You may do it. For example, in the case of a big hit (“probable big hit” or “ordinary big hit”), by determining an early timing as the execution timing of the prefetching notice effect, the longer the prefetching notice effect execution period, the larger the big hit You may make it high expectation for.

  When the effect control CPU 101 determines not to execute the prefetch notice effect (step S6007), the process ends.

  When it is determined to execute the prefetching notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 sets a prefetching notice determination flag (step S6008).

  Further, the production control CPU 101 sets the current first reserved storage number in the second variation counter (step S6009).

  The second variation number counter is a counter for counting the number of variation displays that are executed before the variation display that is the determination target of the prefetch notice effect is started. In this embodiment, when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined during the variation display of the decorative symbol and the second variation number counter is set in the process of step S6009, the variation display during the execution is first performed. At the end of, the value of the second variation counter is decremented by 1 (see step S8322). The period during which no pre-reading notice effect is determined is zero and the pre-reading notice effect is not determined.

  In the process of step S6009, when the decorative symbol variation display is not in progress, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current first reserved memory number in the second variation counter. Is desirable. With such a configuration, it is possible to always end the period in which the pre-reading notice effect determination is not performed until the variable display immediately before the variable display that is the object of the determination at the time of winning.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

  57 and 58 are flowcharts showing the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the value of the first reserved memory number counter or the value of the second reserved memory number counter by −1 (step S8000). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the first reserved memory number on the first reserved memory display unit 18c or the display of the second reserved memory number on the second reserved memory display unit 18d (step S8001). Specifically, the display number is reduced by one. When the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the value of the first reserved memory number counter by -1, and the first reserved memory in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. Decrease the number display by one. When the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set, the value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the display of the second reserved memory number in the second reserved memory display unit 18d is decreased by one. .

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the pre-reading notice execution flag is set (step S8005). If the pre-reading notice execution flag is set (that is, if the pre-reading notice effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S8022. If the pre-reading notice execution flag is not set (that is, if the pre-reading notice effect is not being executed), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the prefetch notice determination flag is set (step S8006). If the pre-reading notice determination flag is set (that is, if the pre-reading notice effect has been determined), the effect control CPU 101 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background corresponding to the high probability / high base state. The background screen is changed to a background screen similar to the screen (for example, a background screen with a red display color) (step S8007), and execution of the prefetch notice effect is started. Then, the production control CPU 101 resets the prefetching notice determination flag and resets the prefetching notice execution flag (step S8008).

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the effect of changing to the background screen similar to the high probability / high base state is executed as the prefetching notice effect. It is not limited to what is shown in the form. For example, by performing an effect similar to the effect executed in the high probability / high base state, or displaying the same character or item as the character or item displayed in the high probability / high base state, May be executed.

  If the prefetching notice determination flag is not set (that is, if the prefetching notice effect is not decided), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the probability change state flag or the high base state flag is set ( Step S8009). If the probability variation state flag or the high base state flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8022.

  If neither the probable change state flag nor the high base state flag is set (that is, if the low probability / low base state), the CPU 101 for effect control uses the first special symbol change display as the start change. It is confirmed whether or not there is (step S8010). Whether or not the first special symbol variation display is made can be specifically determined by confirming whether or not the first symbol variation designation command has been received. If the first special symbol variation display is not started (that is, if the second symbol variation designation command is received and the second special symbol variation display is started), the effect control CPU 101 displays the effect display. The background screen to be displayed on the device 9 is changed to a background screen similar to the background screen corresponding to the high probability / high base state (for example, a red display color background screen) (step S8011), and the background screen is changed. Starts the execution of background effects. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets a background effect executing flag indicating that the background effect is being executed (step S8012).

  In the case of starting the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using a background effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of a background effect, and executes the background effect. Is determined (step S8013).

  FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram of a background effect determination table. In the background effect determination table, a determination value corresponding to not executing the background effect and a determination value corresponding to executing the background effect are set. Note that either the determination value corresponding to not executing the background effect or the determination value corresponding to executing the background effect may be set in the background effect determination table.

  In step S <b> 8013, the effect control CPU 101 first specifies whether the display result of the variable display started this time is “out of”, “normal big hit”, or “probable big hit”. Specifically, if the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 1 designation command, the display result is identified as “out of”, and if the display result 2 designation command is designated, the display is performed. The result is specified as “ordinary big hit”, and if the display result 3 is a designated command, the display result is specified as “probable big hit”. In this embodiment, when the display result is “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”, it is determined that the background effect is not executed as it is. The background effect may be executed even if the display result is “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”. Then, the effect control CPU 101 selects a table corresponding to the specified display result from the background effect determination table shown in FIG. 59, performs a lottery process based on a random number, and determines whether to execute the background effect.

  As shown in FIG. 59, in this embodiment, the determination values in the background effect determination table are allocated when the first reserved storage number in the prefetch notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 55 is 2 (that is, prefetching). This is the same as the determination value allocation in the case where the notice effect is executed for only one variation. Therefore, in this embodiment, the pre-reading notice effect and the background effect are executed in the same manner (the effect of changing to the background screen similar to the high probability / high base state), but the pre-reading notice over a plurality of variations. When the effect is executed, the expectation for the big hit is higher than that when the background effect of only one change is executed, and the expectation for the probable big hit is also higher.

  When it is determined to execute the background effect (step S8014), the effect control CPU 101 sets the background screen to be displayed on the effect display device 9 to the same background screen as the background screen corresponding to the high probability / high base state ( For example, the background screen is changed to a red display color background (step S8015), and the execution of the background effect is started. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets a background effect executing flag indicating that the background effect is being executed (step S8016).

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / high base state, the background screen is changed to a background screen (for example, a red display color background screen) corresponding to the high probability / high base state. Therefore, in this embodiment, the state that is controlled to the high probability / high base state and is changed to the background screen according to the high probability / high base state corresponds to the state that is controlled to the special effect state. Further, in this embodiment, even when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / low base state, the pre-reading notice effect and the background effect are executed and the same background screen as the high probability / high base state ( For example, the background screen of red display color may be changed, and the state in which the pre-reading notice effect and the background effect are executed corresponds to the state in which the special effect is being executed.

  In this embodiment, when the special effect is executed for the first period (when the pre-reading notice effect with only one change is executed or when the background effect is executed), the second period is longer than the first period. (When performing a pre-reading notice effect over a plurality of variations), the expectation degree (reliability) for the big hit is greater when the special effect is performed in the second period than when the special effect is performed in the first period. In addition, the expectation level (reliability) for becoming a probable big hit is high (that is, the expectation level for the big hit (reliability) and the expectation level for being a promising big hit (reliability) as the special performance stage becomes longer. Is high).

  Further, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S8009 to S8012, a special effect is executed when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed when the gaming state is the low probability / low base state. Is possible. The fact that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state means that the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a long period of 5.8 seconds (see FIG. 19). Since the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs and the second special symbol change display is executed, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is operated for 5.8 seconds by the processing of steps S8009 to S8012. This means that the special effect can be executed in the variable display executed based on the start winning at the second start winning opening 14 in the long open state.

  In this embodiment, when the low probability / high base state is controlled after the big hit game based on the normal big hit, the low probability / high base state is changed from the low probability / high base state to 100% when the variable display is finished. Transition to a low base state. Then, when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is released immediately before the end of the low probability / high base state (in this case, since it is in the high base state, the 1.8 second release is performed three times, see FIG. 19). When the start winning prize is given to the second start winning opening 14 in the three 1.8 second releases, the change display of the second special symbol based on the start winning is low probability / low immediately after the end of the high base state. It may be performed in a probability / low base state. Therefore, if it is immediately after the low probability / high base state is finished, for example, the second special symbol is kept in the low probability / low base state until the predetermined number of fluctuation displays is finished (for example, until four fluctuations are finished). Even when the variable display is executed, it is desirable that the special effect is not executed.

  In this embodiment, when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be in the open state in the low base state, the open state is uniformly 5.8 seconds. There may be a plurality of opening times of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 in the low base state (for example, 5.8 seconds and 0.1 seconds). In this case, for example, a case where a winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs during the opening for 5.8 seconds or a case where a winning to the second starting winning opening 14 occurs during the opening for 0.1 seconds. When a command that can specify whether or not the second start symbol 14 is generated during a long-term release for 5.8 seconds and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner is displayed. Only the background effect may be executed.

  In this embodiment, in steps S8007, S8011, and S8015, the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 is exactly the same as the background screen corresponding to the high probability / high base state (for example, a red display color). This shows the case where the special effect is executed by changing to the background screen), but the effect that is partially shared with the effect in the high probability / high base state is not limited to the case where the same effect is executed. May be executed. In this case, for example, only the effect of outputting the same effect sound from the speaker 27 as when the high probability / high base state is controlled is executed, or the same light emission pattern as when the high probability / high base state is controlled Only the effect of turning on or blinking the LED / lamp may be executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8022). The effect control CPU 101 reads data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step S8023). Then, the CPU 101 for effect control determines the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol according to the read variation pattern command and the display result designation command (step S8024). Then, the determined stop symbol is stored in the RAM (step S8025).

  If the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the chance stop symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) is used as the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream in step S8024. The combination of the jackpot symbol that is not reachable and the symbol that is shifted by one symbol) is also determined. Also, in the process of step S8024, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determines the stop symbol of the decoration symbol based only on the variation pattern command. Also good.

  FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stop symbol for a decorative symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 60, when the received display result designation command indicates “ordinary big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 stops. A combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are the same even symbols (non-probable variation symbols) is determined. When the received display result designation command indicates “probable big hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 uses 3 symbols as stop symbols. A combination of decorative symbols arranged with the same odd symbol (probability variable symbol) is determined.

  Specifically, when it is determined to make “normal big hit” or “probable big hit”, the effect control CPU 101 extracts SR1-1 and uses SR1-1 to stop the middle left and right. A symbol (a combination of decorative symbols in which left, middle and right symbols are aligned) is determined.

  Further, when the received display result designation command indicates “suddenly probable big hit” or “small hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 5 designation command or a display result 6 designation command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of decorative symbols (chance) such as “135” as the stop symbol. In the case of “out of” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. Further, a combination of three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is a “stop symbol” as a decorative symbol.

  Specifically, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control is determined to be out-of-band design and is not determined to reach, SR1-1 to SR1-3 are set. The left symbol is extracted using SR1-1, the middle symbol is determined using SR1-2, and the right symbol is determined using SR1-3. If the determined left and right symbols match, the right symbol is shifted by one symbol. When it is decided to reach, SR1-1 to SR1-2 are extracted, the left and right symbols are determined using SR1-1, and the middle symbol is determined using SR1-2. If the determined left middle right symbol is a chance, for example, the left symbol is shifted by one symbol.

  In addition, as for the decorative symbols, a stop symbol reminiscent of a big hit (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right are all the same symbols) is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that recalls a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Further, the production control CPU 101 receives the start winning command (start winning designation command, symbol designation command and variable category command) stored in the first storage area (storage area 1) of the start winning prize command storage area. Delete and shift the contents of the start winning command storage area (step S8026).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes reach effect setting processing for setting the reach effect when reach is specified by the variation pattern (step S8027).

  Next, when the second predetermined effect execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 selects a predetermined effect pattern starting from the first period (see FIG. 43) (steps S8028 and S8029), A process table corresponding to the effect and the variation pattern is selected (step S8030). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the effect period of the predetermined effect in the second predetermined effect timer (step S8031). If the second predetermined effect execution flag is not set, a process table corresponding to the variation pattern is selected (step S8034).

  Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S8035).

  FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbols. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 61 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  In addition, the CPU 101 for effect control, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), effects device (effect display device 9 as an effect component, effect component as an effect component) The control of the various lamps and the speaker 27 as a production component is executed (step S8036). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis, but the effect control CPU 101 controls the change pattern command. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S8037).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8038).

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing reach effect setting processing (step S8027). In the reach effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command read in step S8022 is accompanied by reach (step S6501). If it is accompanied by reach, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the probability variation state flag and the high base state flag are set (step S6502). If the probability variation flag and the high base state flag are set (that is, if the probability / high base state is high), the process proceeds to step S6505. If the high probability state flag or the high base state flag is not set (that is, if the high probability / high base state is not set), the presentation control CPU 101 checks whether the pre-reading notice execution flag is set. (Step S6503). If the pre-reading notice execution flag is set (that is, if the pre-reading notice effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S6505. If the pre-reading notice execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the background effect execution flag is set (step S6504). If the background effect executing flag is set (that is, if the background effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S6505.

  In step S6505, the effect control CPU 101 sets the reach effect mode to be executed during the decorative symbol variation display to a specific reach mode different from the normal reach mode (step S6505). Specifically, the production control CPU 101 sets a flag or information indicating that the specific reach mode is set.

  Thereafter, when the specific reach mode is not set, a process table corresponding to the normal reach mode is selected in steps S8030 and S8034 of the decorative symbol variation start process, and the normal reach mode is displayed during the decorative symbol variation display. Reach production is executed. If the specific reach mode is set, the process table corresponding to the specific reach mode is selected in steps S8030 and S8034 of the decorative symbol variation start process, and the reach effect is performed in the specific reach mode during the decorative symbol variation display. Is executed. For example, a character different from the normal reach mode appears, or a reach effect is executed with a reach pattern different from the normal reach mode.

  In this embodiment, the processing of steps S6501 to S6505 is executed, and in this embodiment, the specific reach is achieved when the special performance state is controlled (when the background screen is changed according to the high probability / high base state). The reach effect of the aspect can be executed, and the reach effect can be executed in the same manner as the specific reach aspect even when the special effect (the pre-reading notice effect and the background effect) is being executed.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect of the specific reach mode is executed in exactly the same manner when the high probability / high base state is controlled, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and when the background effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to the case where the reach effect of the completely same mode is executed, but the reach effect of which some modes are common may be executed. For example, when the high probability / high base state is controlled, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and when the background effect is executed, the effect sound output from the speaker 27, the LED / lamp emission pattern, and the liquid crystal display screen It may be such that only a part of the above display is common.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the second predetermined effect executing flag is set (step S840). When the second predetermined effect execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the value of the second predetermined effect timer by 1 (step S841). Then, when the value of the second predetermined effect timer becomes 0 (step S842), the second predetermined effect is ended (step S843). Further, the effect control CPU 101 resets the second predetermined effect executing flag (step S844).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the values of the process timer and the variable time timer by 1 (steps S845 and S846).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S848). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step S849). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table in the process timer (step S850). Further, in accordance with the contents (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data) set next, the production device (production display device 9 as production component, various lamps and production components as production component) Control of the speaker 27) is executed (step S851).

  Further, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the variable time timer has timed out (step S865). When the variation time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S867). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (step S866), the effect control CPU 101 executes the process of step S867.

  FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 are flowcharts showing the decorative symbol variation stopping process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 resets the confirmed command reception flag if the confirmed command reception flag is set (step S8300). Further, in accordance with the data (data indicating the stop symbol) stored in the decorative symbol display result storage area, the effect display device 9 performs control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol (step S8301).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is decided to make a big hit (step S8303). Whether or not it is decided to win is confirmed by, for example, a display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. In this embodiment, it can also be confirmed whether or not it is decided to make a big hit based on the decided stop symbol. If it is not determined to be a big hit, the process proceeds to step S8311.

  If it is decided to win, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the effect (fanfare effect) informing the start of the big win (step S8304).

  Then, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step S8305). Further, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), an effect device (the effect display device 9 as an effect component, various lamps as an effect component, and an effect component) Control of the speaker 27) is executed (step S8306).

  Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S8307).

  In step S8311, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the first variation counter is 0 (step S8311). If the value of the first fluctuation number counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S8321. If the value of the first variation count counter is not 0, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the first variation count counter (step S8312). Further, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the first variation counter after subtraction is 0 (step S8313). If the value of the first variation counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S8321. When the value of the first variation counter is 0, the effect control CPU 101 sets the second predetermined effect executing flag (step S8314).

  When setting the second predetermined effect execution flag, information that can specify the notification result of the second predetermined effect is also set. For example, the information that can specify the notification result includes a flag indicating that the notification result is “x”, a flag indicating that the notification result is “chance”, and a flag indicating that the notification result is “hot” It is. In addition, for example, when the second predetermined effect execution flag is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), a value that specifies which notification result is a predetermined bit of the second predetermined effect execution flag It may be possible to specify which notification result is set by setting.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the second predetermined effect determination flag (step S8315), and proceeds to step S8321.

  In step S8321, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the second variation number counter is 0 (step S8321). If the value of the second variation counter is 0, the process moves to step S8326. When the value of the second variation number counter is not 0, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the second variation number counter (step S8322). Further, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the second variation number counter is 0 (step S8323). If the value of the second fluctuation number counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S8326. When the value of the second variation number counter is 0, the effect control CPU 101 resets the pre-reading notice execution flag (step S8324). Further, the effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen to be displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen similar to the background screen corresponding to the low probability / low base state (for example, the background screen of the blue display color) (step). S8325), the execution of the prefetch notice effect is terminated.

  In step S8326, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the background effect executing flag is set (step S8326). If the background effect execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the background effect execution flag (step S8327). Further, the effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen to be displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen similar to the background screen corresponding to the low probability / low base state (for example, a blue display color background screen) (step). S8328), the execution of the background effect is terminated.

  In this embodiment, the process of steps S8326 to S8328 is executed to always end the background effect every time the change ends. However, the background effect is executed again even in the next change display. In other words, the background effect may be continuously executed in the next variable display without ending the background effect once at the end of the change.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8329).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 42, the effect control CPU 101 sequentially executes a jackpot display process, a mid-round process, a post-round process, and a jackpot end effect process.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the special gaming state (high probability / high base state in this example) advantageous to the player after the end of the specific gaming state (in this example, the big hit gaming state) In one of a plurality of effect states including a special effect state (in this example, a state in which the background color is changed to a display color (for example, red) corresponding to a high probability / high base state). On the other hand, when it is not controlled to the special effect state (in this example, it is controlled to the low probability / low base state), the special effect in the same mode as the special effect state (in this example, the pre-reading notice) Production and background production). Also, when the special effect is executed and controlled to the specific game state, the special effect state is controlled at a higher rate than in the case where the special effect is not executed and controlled to the specific game state (in this example, 55 and 59, the execution rate of the pre-reading notice effect is higher in the case of “probability big hit” than in the case of “normal big hit.” In other words, the special effect is executed and the big hit is achieved. In such a case, the ratio of control to the high probability / high base state after the big hit game is higher than in the case where the special hit is not executed and the big hit is made.) Then, when the special effect is executed for the first period (in this example, when the pre-reading notice effect with only one change is executed or when the background effect is executed), and when the second effect is executed for a period longer than the first period. (In this example, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed over a plurality of variations), the ratio that the specific display result is derived and displayed when the special effect is executed for the first period and when the special effect is executed for the second period And the special effect state is controlled after the specific game state is ended at a different rate. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 55 and FIG. 59, as the special effects are executed over a large number of fluctuations, the expectation degree (reliability) for the big hit and the probable big hit (being controlled to the probable change state). ) Has high expectations (reliability). Therefore, it is possible to focus attention on the effect period of special effects (in this example, the number of executions), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the background screen similar to that in the high probability / high base state is displayed and the pre-reading notice effect as a special effect is executed by the above-described configuration, Is likely to shift to a high probability / high base state after the jackpot game is over. Therefore, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed, it can be intuitively expected to shift to the high probability / high base state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the case where the pre-reading notice effect as the special effect is continuously executed over a plurality of variations is shown, but it is not always necessary to execute the pre-reading notice effect as the continuous effect, and the pre-reading notice effect is varied according to a plurality of variations. May be executed intermittently. Even in such a configuration, depending on the length of the total execution period of the pre-reading notice effect that is executed intermittently, the probability of jackpot occurrence and the high probability / high base state after the jackpot game ends What is necessary is just to make it different in the migration rate of.

  Further, in this embodiment, as the number of executions of special effects increases, the execution ratio of special effects for probability variation jackpots is the highest, and then the execution ratio of special effects for normal jackpots is the highest, and the special effect execution ratio of outliers is Although the lowest case is shown, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the special effect may be executed many times as many times as compared with the case where the big hit is made without distinguishing between the probable big hit and the normal big hit. Even in such a configuration, as the number of executions of special effects increases, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit increases, and if the degree of expectation for the big hit increases, the probability is controlled to be a probabilistic big hit. Therefore, as the number of executions of special effects increases, the degree of expectation for being controlled in a probable state can be increased.

  Also, in this embodiment, as a special effect, the background screen of the same display color (for example, red) as that in the high probability / high base state (in this example, the same color as in the high probability / high base state) (Change) is shown, but it is not necessarily the same effect as in the high probability / high base state. For example, some of the performance is the same as the performance in the high probability / high base state, and some of the others are different, or the details are not the same, but the overall performance is similar to the performance in the high probability / high base state It is sufficient that the player can recognize that it is in the same effect mode, such as those in the above mode.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the special effect is executed as the effect on the effect display device 9 (the effect on the liquid crystal display screen) is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode. An effect of lighting or blinking the LED / lamp, an effect of outputting a predetermined effect sound from the speaker 27, an effect on the liquid crystal display screen, an effect using the LED / lamp, or an effect using the speaker 27 Various special effects are possible, such as effects that combine all of them.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, a pre-reading notice effect can be executed as a special effect. Compared to the case where the special effect is executed based on the determination result at the time of winning, the special effect is executed for a longer effect period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 55, in the case of “normal big hit” or “probable big hit”, the pre-reading notice effect is executed over many fluctuations. Therefore, the expectation can be improved as the effect period of the special effect becomes longer, and the effect of the special effect can be improved.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which a pre-reading notice effect is executed as a special effect executed over a plurality of execution times. However, for example, a pseudo-continuous effect is executed as a special effect. You may comprise. In this case, for example, as the special effects are executed over many re-variations in the pseudo-series, the expectation degree (reliability) for the big hit and the expectation degree (reliability) for becoming a probable big hit increase. Good.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the special rendering state (controlled to a high probability / high base state and changed to a background screen of a display color (in this example, red) corresponding to the high probability / high base state) The specific reach effect (in this example, the reach effect of the specific reach mode) can be executed while the special effect (the pre-reading notice effect and the background effect) is being executed. The reach production similar to the production can be executed. Therefore, the special effect and the reach effect can be associated, and the effect of the special effect can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the reach mode is determined on the side of the production control microcomputer 100, but it may be determined on the game control microcomputer 560 side. In this case, for example, it may be determined whether or not the game control microcomputer 560 uses the specific reach mode, and a variation pattern command that can also specify the determination result of the reach mode may be transmitted.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the variable winning means (in this example, the variable winning ball device 15) is in an advantageous state (in this example, a long-term open state of 5.8 seconds), and the starting region (in this example). The special effect can be executed in the variable display executed based on the passing of the game ball through the second start winning opening 14). Specifically, the background effect is executed when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed when the low probability / low base state is controlled. Therefore, attention can be paid to the execution opportunity of special effects, and the interest in games can be improved.

  In this embodiment, when the low probability / low base state is controlled, a special effect (pre-reading notice effect or background effect) is executed even when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. (See steps S8005 to S8008 and S8013 to S8016), but the special effect (background effect) can be executed only when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. May be.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a special effect (a pre-reading notice effect and a background effect) can be executed only when the low probability / low base state is controlled. However, the special effect may be configured to be executable. In this case, for example, even when the high base state is controlled, the pre-reading notice effect or the background effect may be determined and executed as a special effect according to the same processing as in this embodiment.

  In this embodiment, a case where a long-term release of 5.8 seconds is performed when the variable winning ball device 15 is opened in a low probability / low base state is shown, but a long-term release such as 5.8 seconds is shown. In addition to the opening, for example, a short-term opening such as 0.1 second may be performed. In such a configuration, when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the short-term open state, the special effect is executed only in the variable display executed based on the winning of the game ball at the second start winning opening 14. You may comprise.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed when the low probability / low base state is controlled (starting during the long-term opening of the variable winning ball device 15 for 5.8 seconds). The case where a special effect (background effect) is always executed is shown in the case of winning a prize). However, this is not necessarily the case where a special effect is executed at a rate of 100%. For example, a lottery based on a random number is performed to make a variable winning ball You may comprise so that a special effect (background effect) may be performed about a part at the time of starting winning a prize during the 5.8 second long-term opening of the apparatus 15. FIG.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the high probability / low base state is controlled as compared with the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. The ratio of probability variation big hits controlled to a high probability / high base state is higher than sudden probability big hits (see FIGS. 8D and 8E). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the special effect is executed and the big hit is made when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, compared with the case where the special effect is not executed and the big win is obtained. Therefore, the ratio of being controlled to the high base state after the big hit game is finished is high.

  Note that the allocation of the jackpot type may be the same when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this case, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 has a type that is not shifted to the high base state when the type is shifted to the high base state (for example, when the probability variation big hit). A special effect (background effect) may be executed at a higher rate than when a big hit is made (for example, when suddenly a probable big hit).

  Further, according to this embodiment, the variable winning means (in this example, the variable winning ball device 15) is in the advantageous state (in this example, a long period of 5.8 seconds) in the normal state (in this example, the low base state). When the open state is reached, the fact that the variable winning means is in an advantageous state is notified (in this example, the first predetermined effect can be executed). Then, after the customer waiting demonstration display ends, the notification by the first predetermined effect is limited (see steps S755 and S757). Therefore, it is possible to prevent notification that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state even though no game is being performed.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
In the first embodiment, the case of executing the pre-reading notice effect in the aspect of changing the background screen in the effect display device 9 has been shown, but in combination with the configuration shown in the first embodiment, the display of the hold display is performed. You may comprise so that execution of the prefetch effect of the aspect which makes an aspect different from normal is possible. Hereinafter, a description will be given of a second embodiment configured to be able to execute a pre-reading effect in a mode in which the display mode of the hold display is different from the normal mode.

  Note that in this embodiment, detailed description of portions that perform the same configuration and processing as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and portions that are different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  In this embodiment, for example, in the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 determines a prefetch effect in a mode that makes the display mode of the hold display different from the normal display mode in addition to the processing shown in FIG. A pre-reading effect determination process is executed. Moreover, in this embodiment, it replaces with the 1st hold memory display part 18c and the 2nd hold memory display part 18d which were shown in 1st Embodiment, and is provided with the sum total hold memory display part which displays the sum total number of hold memory. Shall. Further, in the first embodiment, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol has been shown, but in this embodiment, the first start winning opening is shown. 13 and the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display are executed in the order of the start winning prizes to the 13 and the second start winning opening 14.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing prefetch effect determination processing in the second embodiment. In the prefetch effect determining process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not a prefetch effect restriction flag indicating that execution of the prefetch effect is restricted is set (step S67101). Note that the prefetch effect restriction flag is set in step S67111 described later. If the pre-reading effect restriction flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 displays a new hold display corresponding to the latest hold storage in the normal mode in the combined hold storage display unit (step S67116). For example, when the first to fifth hold displays of the combined hold storage display unit are displayed, the effect control CPU 101 controls to display the sixth hold display in the normal mode.

  If the pre-reading effect restriction flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 stores the past winning determination result (currently received) stored in the winning determination result storage buffer (corresponding to the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 40). All winning winning determination result designation commands (excluding winning determination results indicated by the symbol designation command and the variable category command) are extracted (step S67102).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the extracted winning determination results are all determination results indicating “non-reach” (step S67103). In this embodiment, in step S67103, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the extracted winning determination result is a value indicating that all the variation patterns are “shortened non-reach out” or “non-reach out”. (That is, whether or not there is a deviation fluctuation without reach) is determined.

  If all the winning determination results extracted in step S67103 are determination results indicating “non-reach”, the CPU 101 for effect control proceeds to step S67104. On the other hand, when all of the extracted winning determination results are not determination results indicating “non-reach”, the CPU 101 for effect control displays a new hold display corresponding to the latest hold storage in the combined hold storage display unit in the normal mode. Is displayed (step S67116). In other words, this embodiment is configured not to execute the pre-reading effect on the basis of the newly received winning determination result designation command when there is a pending storage in which a variable display accompanied by a reach effect is performed. In addition to the example shown in FIG. 66, even when there is a holding storage in which a variable display with a reach effect is performed, the prefetch effect is executed based on the newly received winning determination result designation command. May be.

  In step S67104, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the latest winning determination result (the winning determination result indicated in the received winning determination result designation command) stored in the winning determination result storage buffer, and the extracted winning is obtained. Based on the time determination result, it is determined whether or not to execute the prefetch effect (step S67104).

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 uses the prefetch effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 67 (A) to determine whether or not to execute the prefetch effect.

  FIG. 67A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a prefetch effect execution determination table according to the second embodiment. In the pre-reading effect execution determination table, a determination value corresponding to a determination item (“execute a pre-reading effect” or “not execute a pre-reading effect”) is assigned to each determination result at the time of winning, but FIG. 67 (A). In the example shown, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown to simplify the explanation. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, and a determination item (“execute the pre-reading effect” or a determination value assigned with the extracted random number is assigned). “Do not execute pre-reading effect”). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 67 (A), the numerical values corresponding to “execute the prefetch effect” and “do not execute the prefetch effect” in the determination result at each winning are “execute the prefetch effect” as the decision items. Or, the ratio (%) at which “Do not execute pre-reading effect” is selected is shown.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the pre-reading effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 67 (A), the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 67 (B), the pre-reading effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. The prefetch effect change timing determination table shown and the suggested effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 70 are also actually assigned determination values, but the ratio of the determination values assigned is shown to simplify the description. Yes. Also in steps S67106, S67107, S67108, S67110, and S67115, which will be described later, in which those tables are used, as in step S67104, the effect control CPU 101, for example, the final display mode, the prefetch effect pattern, the change timing (the number of shifts). ) Or a random number for determining the presentation mode of the suggestion effect is extracted, and the item to which the determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned is determined.

  In step S67104, the effect control CPU 101 performs the pre-reading effect at a ratio determined for each winning determination result in the pre-reading effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 67 (A) based on the latest extracted winning determination result. Decide whether to execute. For example, when the winning determination result indicates “shortened non-reach”, the effect control CPU 101 determines not to execute the prefetch effect at a rate of 100%. Further, for example, when the winning determination result indicates “per quasi-continuous 3 supermarkets”, the effect control CPU 101 determines to execute the prefetch effect at a rate of 99%.

  In the prefetch effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 67A, the characteristic is that the display result is “normal big hit” or “probability big hit” compared to the case where the display result is “out of place”. The determination value is set so that the rate at which the pre-reading effect is executed increases. In addition, what is characteristic in the prefetch effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 67A is that a reach effect with a high degree of expectation is performed even if the display result is the same (for example, super reach is performed rather than normal reach). The determination value is set so that the rate at which the pre-reading effect is executed increases. By having such a feature, when the pre-reading effect is executed, it is expected that the ratio of occurrence of the big hit in the variable display of the notice target is increased and the big hit is expected compared with the case where the pre-reading effect is not executed. It is possible to increase the rate at which a high reach production is performed. Accordingly, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the pre-reading effect is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 67A, it is determined that the pre-reading effect is executed at a rate of 1% even when the determination result at the time of winning is “non-reach out”, but “non-reach” (“short non-reach”) is determined. In the case of “reach out” or “non-reach out”), it may not be determined to execute the pre-reading effect. In the example shown in FIG. 67 (A), a determination value (ratio) for determining whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect is set for each variation pattern indicated by the determination result at the time of winning. For example, Judgment value (ratio) for determining whether to perform the pre-reading effect for each display result (for example, “out of”, “normal big hit” or “probable big hit”, “suddenly probable big hit” or “small hit”) May be set.

  Next, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the prefetch effect (Y in step S67105), the process proceeds to step S67105a. On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the prefetch effect (N in Step S67105), the effect control CPU 101 displays a new hold display corresponding to the latest hold storage in the normal mode in the combined hold storage display unit. (Step S67116).

  In step S67105a, the effect control CPU 101 sets the summed pending storage number in the effect summed pending storage number counter for specifying the pending display that is the target of the prefetching effect (step S67105a). The value of the effect total reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1 in step S1802a of the decorative symbol variation start process, and is used in step S1811 to specify the hold display that is the target of the prefetch effect. For example, when the value of the total reserved memory number counter for effects is 4, a pre-read effect that changes the display mode of the fourth on-hold display in the total on-hold storage display unit is executed. In this embodiment, the total reserved memory number is obtained by adding the value of the first reserved memory number counter and the value of the second reserved memory number counter.

  Next, the CPU 101 for effect control determines in which display mode the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be notified in the pre-read effect is finally displayed (step S67106). In this embodiment, as a display mode of the hold display, a special mode, a first special mode, and a second special mode are provided in addition to the normal mode. However, as will be described later, the hold display displayed in the special mode changes from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode before the variable display based on the hold information corresponding to the hold display is started. Is displayed. Accordingly, in step S67106, the final display mode is determined as either the first special mode or the second special mode. Hereinafter, the first special mode and the second special mode may be collectively referred to as a special mode.

  FIG. 67B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a final display mode determination table according to the second embodiment. In step S67106, the effect control CPU 101 uses the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 67B to determine which display mode is to be used for final display (hereinafter also referred to as the final display mode). Specifically, the final display mode is determined at a ratio determined for each winning determination result (variable display display result) in the final display mode determination table based on the latest extracted winning determination result. For example, if the winning determination result indicates that the display result of the variable display is “out of”, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode as the first special mode at a rate of 80%. . Further, for example, if the display result of the variable display is “normal jackpot” or “probability jackpot” in the determination result at the time of winning, the presentation control CPU 101 performs the final display mode at a rate of 80%. Is determined as the second special mode.

  A characteristic of the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 67B is that the display result is “normal big hit” or “probability big hit” compared to the case where the display result is “out of place”. The determination value is set so that the ratio determined in the second special mode is high. By providing such a feature, when the hold display is displayed in the second special mode, the ratio of occurrence of the big hit in the variable display of the notice target is higher than when the hold display is displayed in the first special mode. can do. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation that a big hit is displayed in the second special mode rather than the first special mode, and in which display mode the hold display is displayed when the pre-reading effect is executed. Can be focused on.

  In the example shown in FIG. 67 (B), the final display results (“out”, “normal big hit” or “probable big hit”, “suddenly probable big hit” or “small win”) are displayed for each display result shown in the winning determination result. Although the determination value (ratio) for determining the display mode is set, for example, in the same manner as the pre-reading effect execution determination table in FIG. A determination value (ratio) for determining the value may be set. By doing so, when the hold display is displayed in the second special mode, in addition to increasing the ratio of occurrence of jackpots in the variable display of the notice target, the ratio of the high-reach reach effect Can also be high.

  In this embodiment, two types of display modes, the first special mode and the second special mode, are provided as the final display mode, but not limited to this, three or more types of display modes are provided, The degree of expectation may be different (the ratio selected according to the display result is different).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines a prefetch effect effect pattern (hereinafter also referred to as a prefetch effect pattern) (step S67107).

  In this embodiment, a first prefetch effect pattern and a second prefetch effect pattern are provided as prefetch effect patterns. In the first look-ahead effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the change display (hold information) to be notified is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode without being displayed once in the special mode. Note that the first look-ahead effect pattern includes a display in which the hold display corresponding to the change display (hold information) for the advance notice is displayed in the first special mode or the second special form at the timing of the start winning prize, and the change display of the advance notice target. The hold display corresponding to the fluctuating display (hold information) to be notified is changed from the normal mode to the first special mode or the second special mode at any shift timing until the (hold information) starts. Including. On the other hand, in the second look-ahead effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variation display of the advance notice target is displayed in a special manner at the timing of the start winning prize, and at any shift timing until the advance display of the advance notice subject is changed, The display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode.

  In the second look-ahead effect pattern, instead of immediately displaying the special mode at the timing of the start winning prize, the normal mode hold display is displayed at the timing of the start winning prize, and then the timing of shifting the hold display or a predetermined value is displayed. You may make it change from a normal mode to a special mode at the timing when the period passed. Then, the special mode may be changed to the first special mode or the second special mode at the timing when the hold display is further shifted or when the predetermined period has passed.

  FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing a prefetch effect pattern determination table in the second embodiment. In step S67107, the effect control CPU 101 determines a prefetch effect pattern based on the prefetch effect pattern determination table and the total number of reserved storage. Specifically, the CPU 101 for effect control is hit by the display result of the variable display indicated by the latest extracted winning determination result (for example, “normal big hit”, “probability big hit”, “sudden probability big hit” or “small” In the case of “winning”), the hit prefetch effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Then, the effect control CPU 101 converts the look-ahead effect pattern into the first look-ahead effect pattern and the second look-ahead effect pattern at a rate determined for each total number of reserved storages in the hit prefetch effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. And decide to either.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 uses the hit prefetch effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68B when the display result of the variable display indicated by the latest extracted winning time determination result is “out”. Then, the effect control CPU 101 converts the look-ahead effect pattern into the first look-ahead effect pattern and the second look-ahead effect pattern at a ratio determined for each total number of reserved storages in the loss-ahead look-ahead effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. And decide to either.

  For example, the display result of the variable display indicated by the determination result at the time of winning is a hit (for example, “normal jackpot”, “probable big hit”, “suddenly probable big hit” or “small hit”), and the total number of pending storage is 2. In some cases, the effect control CPU 101 determines the prefetch effect pattern as the first prefetch effect pattern at a rate of 35% and the second prefetch effect pattern at a rate of 65%. Further, for example, when the display result of the variable display indicated by the determination result at the time of winning is “out of” and the total number of pending storages is 2, the effect control CPU 101 sets the prefetch effect pattern to a ratio of 65%. Thus, the first prefetch effect pattern is determined as the second prefetch effect pattern at a rate of 35%.

  The prefetch effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68 is characterized in that the display result of the variable display is hit (for example, “normal big hit”, “probability big hit” compared to the case where the display result of the variable display is “out of”. ”,“ Suddenly probable big hit ”or“ Small hit ”), the determination value is set so that the ratio determined in the second look-ahead effect pattern is higher. By having such a feature, when a pre-reading effect is performed with the second pre-reading effect pattern (that is, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode at the time of start winning, and then changed to a special mode and displayed) ) In the variable display of the notice target compared to when the prefetch effect is performed in the first prefetch effect pattern (that is, when the hold display is displayed in the special mode without being displayed once in the special mode). The rate of occurrence of can be increased. In addition, when the display result of the variable display is “normal big hit” or “probable big hit”, since the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, the pre-read effect is performed in the second pre-read effect pattern. (That is, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode at the time of winning the start, and then changed to a special mode and displayed), the hold display displayed in the special mode is a big hit than the first special mode. The rate of change to the second special mode having a high expectation level becomes high. Therefore, attention can be paid to which prefetch effect pattern is used for the prefetch effect. Further, when the pre-reading effect is performed in the second pre-reading effect pattern (that is, when the hold display is displayed in the special mode at the time of starting winning), the hold display displayed in the special mode is expected more than the first special mode. Since it is easy to change to the 2nd special mode with a high degree, a sense of expectation can be raised and game entertainment can be improved. Further, in this embodiment, the hold display displayed in the special mode changes to the first special mode or the second special mode until the variable display corresponding to the hold display (holding information) is started. Since it is displayed, the expectation can be maintained from when the hold display is displayed in a special mode until it changes to a special mode.

  In addition, what is characteristic in the prefetch effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68 is that, when the total pending storage number is 1, a determination value is set so as not to be determined as the second prefetch effect pattern. In this embodiment, in the second look-ahead effect pattern, the timing for displaying the hold display displayed in the special mode at the time of starting winning a prize is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode. This is an arbitrary shift timing until the variable display is started. However, if the total number of pending storage is 1 (that is, only the pending display corresponding to the variable display of the notice target is displayed), if the hold display is shifted once, the variable display of the notice target is supported. The hold display to be erased. For this reason, when the total number of pending storage is 1, the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the noticed change display cannot be changed at the shift timing. Therefore, when the total pending storage number is 1, the determination value is set so that the second prefetch effect pattern is not determined.

  In addition, even if it is a case where the total pending storage number is 1, the second prefetch effect pattern may be determined. In this case, for example, the hold display is displayed in a special manner at the timing of the start winning prize, and at a timing before the hold display is shifted (for example, 2 seconds after the display of the hold display in the special form) You may make it change from a special mode to a 1st special mode and a 2nd special mode (at the time when the time according to the short period or remaining fluctuation time passed). In addition, for example, when the hold display according to the fluctuation currently being executed can be displayed even after the hold display is shifted (when the hold display can be displayed in the so-called active hold display area). In the active hold display area, the special mode may be changed to the first special mode or the second special mode.

  In this embodiment, in order to simplify the description, in the first look-ahead effect pattern, the timing at which the hold display is changed from the normal mode to the first special mode or the second special mode, and the second In the pre-reading production pattern, the timing at which the hold display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode is set as an arbitrary shift timing until the change display of the notice target is started. However, the timing is not limited to this, and may be other timing. For example, the display mode may be changed at an arbitrary timing during the variation display (a period spanning one variation display or a plurality of variation displays) that is executed until the variation display of the notice target is started. In this case, for example, even when the total reserved memory number is 1, the second prefetch effect pattern can be determined, and the hold display is displayed in a special manner at the time of starting winning, and the hold display (hold information) corresponds to the hold display. The display may be changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode before the variable display is started.

  In the example shown in FIG. 68, when the display result indicated by the winning determination result is a win (for example, “ordinary big hit”, “probable big hit”, “suddenly probable big hit” or “small win”) For example, even if the display result is a hit, the case of “normal big hit” or “probable big hit” and “suddenly probable big hit” or “ A prefetch effect pattern determination table for determining any one of the prefetch effect patterns at a different rate in the case of “small hit” may be provided. Further, for example, as with the pre-reading effect execution determination table in FIG. 67 (A), a pre-reading effect pattern determination table for determining any pre-reading effect pattern at a different ratio is provided for each variation pattern indicated by the winning determination result. You may do it. By doing so, when the pre-reading effect is executed with the first pre-reading effect pattern, a high-expectation reach effect is performed in addition to increasing the ratio of occurrence of big hits in the variable display of the notice target. The ratio can also be increased.

  When the pre-read effect pattern is determined, the effect control CPU 101 determines a change timing (in this example, the number of shifts of the hold display) for changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the change display (hold information) to be notified. The determined change timing (number of shifts) is set in a shift number counter for specifying the change timing (number of shifts) (step S67108). In this embodiment, the timing at which the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the fluctuating display (hold information) to be notified changes is any hold display shift timing. Therefore, by determining the change timing (the number of shifts), it is determined how many times the display mode is changed with respect to the hold display corresponding to the noticeable change display. For example, when the change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2, the display mode of the hold display is changed at the timing when the second shift is performed with respect to the hold display corresponding to the change display to be notified.

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram of a change timing determination table according to the second embodiment. In step S67108, the effect control CPU 101 determines the change timing (the number of shifts) of the hold display corresponding to the fluctuating display to be notified based on the change timing determination table and the combined hold storage number. Specifically, the CPU 101 for effect control is hit by the display result of the variable display indicated by the latest extracted winning determination result (for example, “normal big hit”, “probability big hit”, “sudden probability big hit” or “small” If the prefetch effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the first prefetch effect pattern, the first prefetch effect change timing determination table for hit shown in FIG. 69 (A) is used. Then, the CPU 101 for effect control changes the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the notice target at the ratio determined for each total hold memory number in the first prefetch effect change timing determination table at the time of hit shown in FIG. 69 (A). The timing (number of shifts) is determined as 0 (at the time of winning) to 7

  In the example shown in FIG. 69, the fact that the change timing (number of shifts) is 0 means that the hold display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode at the start winning timing. When displaying the hold display in the first special mode or the second special mode at the timing of the start winning prize, for example, it is realized by displaying the new hold display from the beginning in the first special mode or the second special mode. Alternatively, it may be realized by displaying the new hold display once in the normal mode and immediately changing to the first special mode or the second special mode.

  Further, when the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest winning determination result is “out of” and the prefetch effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the first prefetch effect pattern, The first look-ahead effect change timing determination table at the time of loss shown in FIG. 69 (B) is used. Then, the CPU 101 for effect control changes the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the notice target at the ratio determined for each total hold memory number in the first prefetch effect change timing determination table at the time of failure shown in FIG. 69 (B). The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 0 (at the time of winning a prize) to 7.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 wins the display result of the variable display indicated by the latest extracted winning determination result (for example, “normal big hit”, “probability big hit”, “sudden probability big hit” or “small hit”). When the prefetch effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the second prefetch effect pattern, the hit second prefetch effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 69 (C) is used. Then, the CPU 101 for effect control changes the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the notice target at the rate determined for each combined hold memory number in the second prefetch effect change timing determination table for hit shown in FIG. 69 (C). The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 0 (at the time of winning a prize) to 7.

  In addition, when the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest winning determination result is “out of” and the prefetch effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the second prefetch effect pattern, the effect control CPU 101 The second prefetch effect change timing determination table at the time of loss shown in FIG. 69 (D) is used. Then, the CPU 101 for effect control changes the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the notice target at the rate determined for each total hold memory number in the second prefetch effect change timing determination table at the time of loss shown in FIG. 69 (D). The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 0 (at the time of winning a prize) to 7.

  For example, when using the first pre-reading effect change timing determination table for winning, if the total number of pending storage is 3, the effect control CPU 101 sets the change timing (number of shifts) to 0 (winning) at a rate of 50%. The change timing (number of shifts) is determined as 1 at a rate of 30%, and the change timing (number of shifts) is determined as 2 at a rate of 20%. Also, when using the first look-ahead effect change timing determination table at the time of loss, if the total pending storage number is 3, the effect control CPU 101 sets the change timing (number of shifts) to 0 (winning) at a rate of 20%. The change timing (number of shifts) is determined as 1 at a rate of 30%, and the change timing (number of shifts) is determined as 2 at a rate of 50%.

  Further, for example, when using the second pre-reading effect change timing determination table at the time of hitting, if the total number of pending storage is 3, the effect control CPU 101 sets the change timing (number of shifts) to 1 at a rate of 30%. And the change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2 at a ratio of 70%. Further, when using the second pre-reading effect change timing determination table at the time of loss, if the total pending storage number is 3, the effect control CPU 101 determines the change timing (number of shifts) as 1 at a ratio of 70%. The change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2 at a rate of 30%.

  The prefetch effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 69 is characterized in that the display result of the variable display is more favorable in the case of the first prefetch effect pattern than in the case where the display result of the variable display is “out”. (For example, “normal big hit”, “probable big hit”, “sudden probability big hit” or “small hit”) It has been done. By having such a feature, when a prefetch effect is performed with the first prefetch effect pattern (that is, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode without being displayed once in a special mode), the hold display is performed. If the number of shifts is changed from the normal mode to the special mode with a smaller number of shifts, the percentage of occurrence of hits in the variable display of the notice target can be increased, and is displayed in a special mode at the time of start winning (shift number 0) Therefore, the rate of occurrence of hits can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to give interest to the timing at which the hold display changes, and to enhance the game entertainment.

  The characteristic of the prefetch effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 69 is that, in the case of the second prefetch effect effect pattern, the display result of the variable display is more favorable than the case where the display result of the variable display is “out”. (For example, “normal big hit”, “probable big hit”, “suddenly probable big hit” or “small hit”) The judgment value is set so that the ratio determined at the change timing with a large number of shifts is higher. It has been done. By having such a feature, when a pre-reading effect is performed in the second pre-reading effect pattern (that is, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode at the time of winning a start and then changed to a special mode), When the special mode hold display is changed to the special mode with a larger number of shifts (that is, after many shifts are performed), the ratio of occurrence of hit in the variable display of the notice target can be increased. In other words, the longer the period from when the hold display is displayed in the special mode to when it changes to the special mode (that is, the slower the timing of the change), the higher the rate of occurrence of the hit in the variable display of the notice target. . Therefore, the hold display can be changed at a plurality of timings, and attention can be paid to the timing at which the hold display displayed in a special mode changes, thereby enhancing the gaming fun.

  In this embodiment, in order to simplify the explanation, the timing of changing the display mode of the hold display is set as an arbitrary shift timing until the display of the change of the notice target is started. In the case where the display mode can be changed at an arbitrary timing until the display is started, for example, a plurality of types of change timing patterns that can specify the timing to change (such as during specific shift timing or during specific fluctuation display). May be provided, and either one may be selected according to the determination result at the time of winning.

  In the example shown in FIG. 69, in the case of the first look-ahead effect pattern, it is advantageous that the number of shifts is small (that is, the change timing is earlier), and in the case of the second look-ahead effect pattern, the number of shifts is large. However, in order to make it easier for the player to understand, for example, in the case of the first look-ahead effect pattern, the number of shifts is greater (that is, the change is changed). It may be set such that the later the timing is, the more advantageous. Further, for example, in the case of the second look-ahead effect pattern, it may be set such that the smaller the number of shifts (that is, the earlier the change timing), the more advantageous.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 69, the display result indicated by the winning determination result is a win (for example, “ordinary big hit”, “probable big hit”, “suddenly probable big hit” or “small hit”). For example, even if the display result is a hit, the case of “normal big hit” or “probable big hit” and “suddenly probable big hit” or “ A change timing determination table for determining any change timing (number of shifts) at a different rate in the case of “small hit” may be provided. In addition, for example, as in the pre-reading effect execution determination table in FIG. 67 (A), a change determined at any change timing (number of shifts) at a different rate for each variation pattern indicated by the winning determination result. A timing determination table may be provided. By doing so, according to the change timing of the hold display corresponding to the change display of the notice target, the ratio of occurrence of the big hit in the change display of the notice target is different and the ratio that the reach effect with high expectation is performed Can also be different.

  In this embodiment, in the second look-ahead effect pattern, a new hold display is displayed in a special mode at the start winning timing, but the hold display is displayed in a normal mode at the start winning timing, and any later It is also possible to change from the normal mode to the special mode at the timing, and further change from the special mode to the special mode at any later timing.

  When the change timing (the number of shifts) is determined, the effect control CPU 101 performs the hold display change timing when the prefetch effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the second prefetch effect pattern (Y in step S67109). An effect mode of the suggestion effect is determined (step S67110). In this embodiment, a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display is changed can be executed at the shift timing. In addition, the suggestion effect is executed in the first effect mode or the second effect mode. In step S67110, the effect mode of the suggestion effect executed at the change timing of the hold display is determined as either the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

  In this embodiment, the hold display changes to the first special mode or the second special mode at a different rate according to the effect mode of the suggestion effect. Specifically, when the suggestion effect is executed in the first effect mode, the ratio of the hold display changing to the first special mode is high, and when the suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode, the hold effect is held. The rate at which the display changes to the second special mode is high. Therefore, it is suggested that the display mode of the hold display changes by executing the suggestion effect, and depending on which effect mode the suggestion effect is executed, which special mode is likely to change? It is suggested. Although details will be described later, the hold display changes at the shift timing, but the suggestion effect is also executed at a shift timing other than the shift timing at which the hold display changes. Therefore, in order to distinguish between these, the suggestion effect executed at the shift timing at which the hold display changes is also referred to as the suggestion effect (success pattern), and the shift timing other than the shift timing at which the hold display changes (that is, the hold display changes). The suggestion effect executed at the shift timing before the shift timing) is also referred to as the suggestion effect (passing pattern). In this embodiment, both the suggestion effect (success pattern) and the suggestion effect (passage pattern) are executed in the first effect mode or the second effect mode. Therefore, the ratio at which the display mode of the hold display changes may vary depending on the presentation mode of the suggestion effect. For example, when the suggestion effect is executed in the first effect mode (for example, the first effect mode A different from the first effect mode and the second effect mode of this embodiment), the hold display changes. The suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode (for example, the first effect mode B may be different from the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the first effect mode A of this embodiment). In such a case, the rate at which the hold display changes may be increased. That is, when the suggestion effect is executed in the first effect mode (first effect mode A), the ratio of the suggestion effect (success pattern) is high, and the suggestion effect is the second effect mode (first effect mode B). In the case where it is executed, the ratio of the suggestion effect (passing pattern) may be increased.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a suggestion effect mode determination table according to the second embodiment. In step S67110, the effect control CPU 101 uses the suggestion effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 70 to determine the effect mode of the suggestion effect performed at the change timing of the hold display. Specifically, based on the latest extracted winning determination result, the effect mode is set to the first effect mode or the ratio determined for each winning determination result (variable display display result) in the final display mode determination table. It is determined as one of the second effect modes. For example, when the display result of the variable display is shown as “out of” in the determination result at the time of winning, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect mode as the first effect mode at a rate of 80%, The production mode is determined as the second production mode at a rate of 20%. Further, for example, when the display result of the variable display is “normal jackpot” or “probable bonus jackpot” in the determination result at the time of winning, the presentation control CPU 101 changes the presentation mode at a rate of 20%. The first production mode is determined, and the production mode is determined as the second production mode at a rate of 80%. Further, for example, when the winning determination result indicates that the display result of the variable display is “suddenly probable big hit” or “small hit”, the production control CPU 101 produces the production mode at a rate of 50%. Is determined as the first effect mode, and the effect mode is determined as the second effect mode at a ratio of 50%.

  In the suggestion effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 70, the second characteristic is that the display result is “ordinary big hit” or “probability big hit” compared to the case where the display result is “out of place”. That is, it is set so that the ratio determined in the production mode is high. By having such a feature, when the suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode, the ratio of occurrence of the big hit in the variable display of the notice target is higher than when the suggestion effect is displayed in the first effect mode. can do. In addition, when the display result of the variable display is “normal big hit” or “probable big hit”, since the final display mode of the hold display is high in the second special mode, the suggestive stage is executed in the second stage. In such a case, the rate at which the display mode of the hold display changes to the second special mode having a higher expectation than the first special mode is increased. Therefore, it is possible to give diversity to the suggestion effect, and it is possible to focus on which effect mode the suggestion effect is executed, and to improve the game entertainment.

  In the example shown in FIG. 70, the suggested effect is produced for each display result (“out of”, “normal big hit” or “probable big hit”, “suddenly probable big hit” or “small win”) shown in the winning determination result. Although the ratio for determining the mode is determined, for example, as in the pre-reading effect execution determination table in FIG. 67 (A), the effect mode of the suggested effect is determined for each variation pattern indicated by the determination result at the time of winning. A determination value (ratio) may be set. By doing so, when the suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode, in addition to increasing the rate at which the big hit is generated in the variable display of the notification target, the rate at which the reach effect with high expectation is performed Can also be high.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 70, the direction of the suggestion effect is determined depending on whether the determination result at the time of winning is a win ("normal big hit", "probability big hit", "suddenly probable big hit", "small win"). However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, you may comprise so that the production | presentation aspect of a suggestion effect may be determined according to whether it is determined to change the display aspect of a hold display.

  In this embodiment, the suggestion effect is always executed at the shift timing at which the display mode of the hold display changes. However, the suggestion effect may not be executed. In this case, since the display mode of the hold display can be suddenly changed without being suggested by the suggestion effect, an unexpected feeling can be enhanced.

  Further, in this embodiment, two types of effect modes, the first effect mode and the second effect mode, are provided as the effect modes of the suggestion effect, but not limited to this, three or more effect modes are provided. The degree of expectation may be different (the ratio selected according to the display result is different).

  When the effect mode of the suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 101 sets a prefetch effect restriction flag indicating that execution of the prefetch effect is restricted (step S67111).

  When the prefetch effect restriction flag is set, control is performed so that the prefetch effect is not repeatedly executed by the process of step S67101. That is, in this embodiment, when any one of the hold displays is displayed in a special manner, control is performed so as not to newly perform a prefetch effect. Therefore, it is restricted that a plurality of hold displays are displayed in a special manner. Therefore, by displaying a plurality of hold displays in a special manner, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused about which hold display should be noted.

  In this embodiment, when any hold display is displayed in a special manner, control is performed so that the pre-reading effect is not executed repeatedly. This may be allowed at a fixed rate or completely. In other words, the processing of step S67111 may be omitted at a fixed rate or completely, thereby allowing a plurality of hold displays to be displayed in a special mode at a fixed rate or completely. In addition, for example, even when any one of the hold displays is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode without being limited to the special mode, the pre-reading effect may be controlled not to be repeatedly executed. For example, when the process of step S67114 is executed, when the process of step S67115 is executed, or when it is determined that it is time to change the hold display from the normal mode to the special mode in the decorative symbol variation start process (for example, step This can be realized by setting a prefetch effect restriction flag in S1803). In this case, the prefetch effect restriction flag may be reset when the hold display displayed in the special mode is erased (that is, the prefetch effect is displayed while the hold display is displayed in the special mode. Execution is restricted). By doing in this way, when any hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode, it is restricted that other hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode due to a new prefetch effect. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to know which hold display should be noted.

  Further, for example, when any one of the hold displays is displayed in the special mode, the first special mode, or the second special mode, a new prefetch effect may be easily executed. In other words, the pre-reading effects may be easily executed repeatedly. Further, for example, in the case of a specific gaming state (for example, a probable change state or a short time state), the pre-reading effect may be easily executed repeatedly. For example, in a configuration that allows a pre-read effect to be executed repeatedly at a certain rate, it can be realized by increasing the allowed rate in a specific gaming state.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs control so that a new hold display is displayed in a special manner in the total hold storage display unit (step S67112). In step S67112, the effect control CPU 101 controls to display a new hold display in a special mode, and also shows information indicating the final display mode determined in step S67106 and the effect of the suggested effect determined in step S67110. Information indicating the mode is stored in a storage area formed in the RAM. By storing these pieces of information, it is possible to specify which final display mode and the presentation mode of the suggestive effect has been determined in the decorative symbol variation start process.

  If the prefetch effect pattern determined in step S67107 is not the second prefetch effect pattern (N in step S67109), that is, if it is determined to be the first prefetch effect pattern, the effect control CPU 101 in step S67108. It is confirmed whether or not the determined change timing is at the time of starting winning (step S67113). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the shift number counter is zero. If the change timing is at the time of start winning (Y in Step S67113), the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the new hold display is displayed in the final display mode determined in Step S67107 in the total hold storage display unit. (Step S67114).

  If the change timing is not at the time of winning in step S67113 (N in step S67113), the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect mode of the suggested effect performed at the change timing of the hold display, as in step S67110 described above ( Step S67115). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that a new hold display is displayed in the normal mode in the total hold storage display unit (step S67116). Also in step S67116 (for example, only when the process proceeds from step S67115), the effect control CPU 101 controls to display a new hold display and the final display determined in step S67106 as in step S67112. The information indicating the mode and the information indicating the effect mode of the suggestion effect determined in step S67115 are stored in the storage area formed in the RAM. By storing these pieces of information, it is possible to specify which final display mode and presentation mode of the suggestive effect has been determined in the decorative symbol variation start process described later.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a winning determination result designation command is received, in the pre-reading effect determination process, a new hold display is any one of the normal mode, the special mode, the first special mode, or the second special mode. The display process is performed.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) in the second embodiment. In this embodiment, in the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 performs processes corresponding to steps S8000 to S8016 and S8027 to S8031 shown in FIGS. 57 and 58 in addition to the processes shown in FIG. Also execute.

  In this embodiment, in the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first deletes the first winning determination result (oldest determination result) stored in the winning determination result storage buffer, and wins the prize. The contents of the judgment result storage buffer are shifted, the first hold display in the combined hold storage display unit is erased, the remaining hold display is shifted one by one, and the combined hold storage number display in the combined hold storage display unit Is updated (step S1800). For example, when the first to fifth hold displays in the combined hold storage display section are displayed, the first hold display is erased at the shift timing and the second hold display is displayed. The display is shifted to the first display area, the hold display that was displayed third is shifted to the second display area, and the hold display that is displayed fourth is the third display area. The hold display that was displayed in the fifth position is shifted to the fourth display area. In the case where the variable display of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is preferentially executed, the effect control CPU 101 is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol. When the decorative symbol variation display is executed (specifically, when the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set), the first winning determination result storage buffer (the first winning variation determination buffer shown in FIG. 40) is used. The first winning determination result stored in the first start winning prize command storage area is deleted, and the contents of the first winning determination result storage buffer are shifted. Further, when the decorative symbol variation display is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol (specifically, when the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set), the second winning prize is displayed. The first winning determination result stored in the determination result storage buffer (corresponding to the second start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 40) is deleted, and the contents of the second winning determination result storage buffer are shifted.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the shift number counter for specifying the change timing (number of shifts) is greater than 0 (step S1801). If the value of the shift counter is greater than 0, it means that it has been decided to execute a pre-reading effect that changes the display mode for any of the hold displays displayed in the combined hold storage display unit. Show. Therefore, in step S1801, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined to execute the prefetching effect (change the display mode of the hold display).

  If the value of the shift counter is not greater than 0 (N in step S1801), that is, it is determined that the value of the shift counter is 0 and the prefetch effect is executed (the display mode of the hold display is changed). If not, the effect control CPU 101 moves the process to step S1804.

  On the other hand, if the value of the shift counter is greater than 0 (Y in step S1801), that is, if it is determined to execute the prefetch effect (change the display mode of the hold display), it is for effect control. The CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect total storage number counter (step S1802a). The effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the shift counter (step S1802b). Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the shift counter is 0 (step S1803). If the value of the shift counter is 0 as a result of subtracting 1 from the value of the shift counter in step S1802b, it changes the display mode of any of the hold displays displayed on the combined hold storage display unit. This indicates that it is time to execute the pre-reading effect. Therefore, in step S1803, it is confirmed whether or not it is the change timing of the prefetch effect that changes the display mode of the hold display.

  In step S1803, if the value of the shift number counter is not 0, that is, if it is not the change timing of the prefetch effect that changes the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 shifts the process to step S1804. On the other hand, when the value of the shift number counter is 0, that is, when it is the change timing of the prefetch effect that changes the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S1808.

  In step S1804, the effect control CPU 101 reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S1804).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays the decorative pattern display result (ie, the received display result specifying command) in accordance with the variation pattern command read in step S1804 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (ie, the received display result specifying command). A stop symbol is determined (step S1805). That is, the display control result of the variable display of the identification information (decoration of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means by executing the process of step S1805 by the CPU 101 for effect control. A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized. The effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined decorative symbol stop pattern in the decorative symbol display result storage area.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines a suggestion effect mode that suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes (step S1806). Here, the process of step S1806 is not executed at the timing at which the display mode of the hold display changes due to the pre-reading effect. Therefore, in step S1806, although it is suggested that the display mode of the hold display is changed, as a result, the effect mode of the suggestive effect that is executed when the display mode does not change is determined. In addition, in order to distinguish from the suggestion effect (success pattern) executed when the display mode of the hold display changes, the suggestion effect executed when the display mode does not change is also referred to as the suggestion effect (passing pattern).

  In step S1806, when the prefetch effect restriction flag is not set, that is, when any hold display is not displayed in a special manner on the combined hold display unit 18c, the effect control CPU 101 indicates the suggestion shown in FIG. The ratio of the effect (passing pattern) determination table is determined not to execute the suggesting effect (passing pattern) or to execute in the first effect mode or the second effect mode. Further, when the prefetch effect restriction flag is set, that is, when any hold display is displayed in a special manner in the combined hold display unit 18c, the effect control CPU 101 indicates the suggested effect shown in FIG. 71 (B). It is determined that the suggestion effect (passage pattern) is not executed or is executed in the first effect mode or the second effect mode at the ratio of the (passage pattern) determination table. The suggestion effect (passing pattern) determination table is assigned a determination value corresponding to a determination item (“no effect”, “first effect mode”, or “second effect mode”). In the examples shown in A) and (B), the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown for the sake of simplicity. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the effect mode of the suggestion effect (passing pattern), and the determination items ("No effect", "No. 1 effect mode "or" 2nd effect mode ").

  For example, when the pre-reading effect restriction flag is not set, that is, when any hold display is not displayed in a special manner in the combined hold display unit 18c, it is determined that the suggested effect (passing pattern) is not executed at a rate of 60%. The suggestion effect is determined to be executed in the first effect mode at a rate of 30%, and the suggestion effect is determined to be executed in the second effect mode at a rate of 10%. Further, when the pre-reading effect restriction flag is set, that is, when any hold display is displayed in a special manner in the combined hold display unit 18c, the suggested effect (passing pattern) must be executed at a rate of 0%. It is determined that the suggestion effect is executed in the first effect mode at a rate of 60%, and it is determined that the suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode at a rate of 40%.

  As shown in FIGS. 71A and 71B, in this embodiment, when the pre-reading effect restriction flag is set, that is, one of the hold displays is displayed in a special manner in the combined hold display unit 18c. If so, the suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than in the case where it is not. Therefore, the expectation when the hold display is displayed in a special mode can be enhanced, and the game entertainment can be enhanced. In this embodiment, since the suggestion effect is executed even when the display mode of the hold display changes, the suggestion effect is always executed when the hold display is displayed in a special mode. However, even when the hold display is displayed in a special manner, the suggestion effect may not be executed. However, also in this case, it is desirable that the suggestive effect is executed at a higher rate than when the hold display is not displayed in a special manner.

  Further, when the pre-reading effect restriction flag is set, that is, when any hold display is displayed in a special mode in the total hold display unit 18c, the final display mode of the hold display is the first display mode or You may make it determine the production | presentation aspect of a suggestion effect in a different ratio to a 1st production | presentation aspect or a 2nd production | presentation aspect according to which is a 2nd display aspect. For example, when the final display mode is determined to be the second display mode with a higher expectation level than the first display mode, the suggestion effect mode is set to the second effect mode with a higher level of expectation than the first display mode. You may make it raise the ratio determined. Further, in this embodiment, as will be described later, display control in which an arrow jumps from the right side of the display area is performed in the effect display device 9 as a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display changes. When the display mode of the hold display changes (in the case of the suggestion effect (success pattern)), display control is performed in which the arrow that has been pierced pierces the hold display corresponding to the hold information to be notified. In addition, when the display mode of the hold display does not change (in the case of a suggestion effect (passing pattern)), display control is performed in which the flying arrow passes through the display area as it is. Therefore, in step S1806, it is not necessary to specify the hold display corresponding to the hold information to be notified using the effect combined hold memory number counter as in step S1811 described later. For example, in the effect display device 9 as an suggestive effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes at both the timing when the display mode of the hold display is changed and when it is not the timing, When it is time to change the display mode of the hold display when the arrow where the arrow flew from the right side of the display area is inserted into the hold display corresponding to the hold information to be notified and changes the display mode of the hold display, When the display mode is changed (corresponding to the suggestion effect (success pattern)) and it is not the timing to change the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display with an arrow stuck is not changed (the suggestion effect (passing pattern in this example) Equivalent to)). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 specifies a hold display corresponding to the hold information to be notified in step S1806 using the effect total hold memory number counter in step S1811 described later, and step S1807. The process table for executing the suggestion effect for the hold display specified in step 1 may be selected, or the hold display in which an arrow sticks out is randomly determined from the displayed hold displays, and the determined hold display is selected. A process table for executing the suggestion effect may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 101 for effect control selects a process table according to the effect mode and the variation pattern of the determined suggestion effect (passing pattern) (step S1807). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S1812).

  In addition, the CPU 101 for effect control, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), effects device (effect display device 9 as an effect component, effect component as an effect component) The control of the various lamps and the speaker 27 as an effect part is executed (step S1813). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the change time specified by the change pattern command in the change time timer (step S1814), and sets the value of the effect control process flag in the decorative pattern changing process (step S802). (Step S1815).

  When it is determined in step S1803 that the value of the shift counter is 0, that is, when it is the change timing of the prefetch effect that changes the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 sets the prefetch effect restriction flag. If so, it is reset (step S1808). By executing such processing, in this embodiment, it is possible to restrict execution of a pre-reading effect during a period in which the hold display is displayed in a special manner, and a plurality of hold displays are special. It is possible to limit the display in a manner.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S1809). Next, the CPU 101 for effect control displays the decorative pattern display result (ie, the received display result specifying command) in accordance with the variation pattern command read in step S1809 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (ie, the received display result specifying command). A stop symbol is determined (step S1810).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a display mode change process table according to the effect mode of the suggestion effect, the final display mode of the hold display specified by the total reserved memory counter for the effect, and the variation pattern. (Step S1811). Then, control goes to a step S1812.

  The process table for changing the display mode is to execute a suggestion effect (success pattern) at the start of the change of the decorative pattern and a pre-reading effect to change the display mode of the specific hold display, along with the display of the decorative pattern change. It is a table in which process data for performing control is set. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of process tables for changing display modes are provided according to the suggestion effect (success pattern) to be executed and the aspect of the prefetch effect. Moreover, in this embodiment, the presentation mode of the suggestion presentation (success pattern) determined in the pre-reading presentation determination process (step S67110 or S67115) (in this example, the first production mode or the second production mode). And a pending display of the production target specified by the production total pending storage number counter (for example, when the value of the production total pending storage number counter is 2, the second pending display in the total pending storage display unit), Based on the final display mode (in this example, the first display mode or the second display mode) that is determined in the pre-reading effect determination process (step S67106) and stored in any way, the suggested effect (success pattern) Can be specified, and the pre-reading effect that changes which hold display to what display mode can be specified. Therefore, the CPU 101 for effect control has a plurality of types of display modes according to the effect mode of the suggestion effect (success pattern), the final display mode of the hold display specified by the total reserved memory number counter for the effect, and the variation pattern. The production mode determined in the pre-reading production determination process by selecting one of the process tables for the change time and executing the control of the production device according to the contents of the process data 1 of the selected process table for the display mode change. The pre-production effect can be executed by executing the suggestion effect (success pattern) and changing the hold display corresponding to the fluctuating display of the notice target to the determined display mode.

  Next, a specific example of the prefetch effect will be described. FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the prefetching effect based on the first prefetching effect pattern in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 72 (A), in the effect display device 9, the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, and the two on-hold displays are displayed in the normal hold mode (“◯” in this example). When a start winning is performed while the game is being performed, a prefetch effect mode (prefetch effect pattern, final display mode, change timing) and a suggestion mode are determined, and a new hold display is displayed according to the determination result. . In the example shown in FIG. 72, the pre-read effect pattern is determined as the first pre-read effect pattern, the final display mode is determined as the first special mode or the second special mode, and the change timing is set at the time of starting winning (shift number 0) or shift. Number of times 1 is determined. In addition, the production mode of the suggestion production (success pattern) is determined as the first production mode or the second production mode.

  In this embodiment, in the prefetching effect based on the first prefetching effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (holding information) to be notified is not displayed once in the special form, but the first display of the final display form. It is displayed in a special mode or a second special mode. Moreover, the timing at which the hold display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode is a start winning timing or an arbitrary shift timing. Therefore, when the change timing is determined at the time of the start winning (the number of shifts is 0) and the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in FIG. The third hold display is displayed in the hold storage display section in the first special mode (in this example, “x” is included in “◯”). Further, when the change timing is determined at the time of start winning (the number of shifts is 0) and the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. The third hold display is displayed in the hold storage display section in the second special mode (in this example, two “x” are included in “◯”).

  Even if the final display mode is the first special mode or the second special mode, the change timing is determined not at the start winning timing (number of shifts 0) but at an arbitrary shift timing (here, the number of shifts 1). In this case, as shown in FIG. 72 (B3), at the timing of the start winning prize, the third hold display is displayed in the normal hold mode (“◯” in this example) on the total hold storage display unit. Then, when the decorative symbol display is stopped (FIG. 72 (C)) and the variable display based on the hold information corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first hold display is erased. The first and third hold displays are shifted respectively.

  At this time, when the change timing is determined as the number of shifts 1 and the effect mode of the suggestion effect (success pattern) is determined as the first effect mode, the suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display changes. In the effect display device 9, display control is performed in which a black arrow flies from the right side of the display area (FIG. 72 (D1)).

  When the final display mode is determined as the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 72 (E1), the second hold display (see FIG. B3) A black arrow is inserted into the newly displayed hold display) (a suggestion effect (success pattern) of the first effect mode) and a hold display with a black arrow is displayed in the first special mode ( In this example, “X” is included in “◯”). When the final display mode is determined as the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 72 (E2), the second hold display (see FIG. In B3), an effect in which a black arrow is stabbed in the newly displayed hold display) (a suggestion effect (success pattern) in the first effect mode) is performed, and a hold display in which the black arrow is struck is a second special mode ( In this example, two “x” s are included in “◯”).

  In addition, when the change timing is determined as the number of shifts 1 and the effect mode of the suggestion effect (success pattern) is determined as the second effect mode, the suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display changes. In the effect display device 9, display control is performed in which white arrows fly from the right side of the display area (FIG. 72 (D2)).

  When the final display mode is determined as the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 72 (E3), the second hold display (see FIG. In B3), an effect in which a white arrow is stabbed in the newly displayed hold display) (a suggestion effect (success pattern) in the second effect mode) is performed, and a hold display in which a white arrow is struck is the first special mode ( In this example, “X” is included in “◯”). When the final display mode is determined as the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 72 (E4), the second hold display (see FIG. B3) A white arrow is stabbed in the newly displayed hold display) (a suggestion effect (success pattern) of the second effect mode) and a hold display with a white arrow is displayed in the second special mode ( In this example, two “x” s are included in “◯”).

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the presentation mode of the suggestion presentation (success pattern) is the second presentation mode, the display mode of the hold display is the first compared to the first presentation mode. It is configured such that the ratio of the second special mode having a higher degree of expectation of being a big hit than the one special mode is high. Accordingly, when the presentation mode of the suggestion stage (success pattern) is the first stage, that is, when the black arrow is blown and stuck in the hold display, the ratio of the hold display changing to the first special mode with low expectation is obtained. high. That is, the ratio of transition from FIG. 72 (D1) to FIG. 72 (E1) is high. On the other hand, when the suggestion effect (success pattern) is in the second effect mode, that is, when a white arrow is blown and stuck in the hold display, the ratio at which the hold display changes to the second special mode with high expectation is obtained. high. That is, the rate of transition from FIG. 72 (D2) to FIG. 72 (E4) is high. By being configured in this way, even if the suggestion effect (success pattern) that the arrow is flying and stuck in the hold display is made to feel that it is desired to be performed in the second effect mode, the suggestion effect is the first effect mode. When this is done, that is, when a black arrow flies, it is possible to feel that it is desired to pass without being stuck in the hold display (I want it to be a suggestion effect (passing pattern)).

  FIGS. 73 and 74 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of prefetching effects based on the second prefetching effect pattern in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 73 (A), in the effect display device 9, the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, and the two on-hold displays are displayed in the normal mode (“◯” in this example) on the total on-hold storage display unit. When a start winning is performed while the game is being performed, a prefetch effect (prefetch effect pattern, final display mode, change timing) and a suggestive mode are determined, and a new hold display is displayed according to the determination result. In the example shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the prefetch effect pattern is determined as the second prefetch effect pattern, the final display mode is determined as the first special mode or the second special mode, and the change timing is the shift count 1 or the shift count 2 And decide. In addition, the suggestion effect mode is determined as the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

  In this embodiment, in the pre-reading effect based on the second pre-reading effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (holding information) to be notified is displayed in a special manner at the start winning timing, and at any shift timing The final display mode is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode. Therefore, when the prefetch effect pattern is determined to be the second prefetch effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), the third hold display is displayed on the total hold storage display unit at the timing of the start winning prize as a special mode (this In the example, six lines are drawn outside “◯”).

  Then, when the decorative symbol display is stopped (FIG. 73 (C)), and the variable display based on the hold information corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first hold display is erased. The first and third hold displays are shifted respectively. At this time, if the effect mode of the suggestion effect is determined to be the second effect mode, a white arrow will fly from the right side of the display area in the effect display device 9 as the suggestion effect suggesting that the hold display changes. (Second effect mode) Display control is performed (FIG. 73D).

  Here, when the change timing is determined as the number of shifts 1 and the final display mode is determined as the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 73 (E1), the total pending storage display unit at the shift timing. The second hold display (corresponding to the hold display in the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 73 (B3)) is struck by a white arrow (a suggestion effect (success pattern) of the second effect mode). The hold display with a white arrow is changed from the special mode to the first special mode (in this example, “x” is included in “◯”) and displayed. Further, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 1 and the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 73 (E2), at the timing of the shift, While the second hold display (corresponding to the hold display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 73 (B3)), an effect that a white arrow is stabbed (a suggested effect (success pattern) of the second effect mode) is performed, The hold display with a white arrow is changed from the special mode to the second special mode (in this example, two “x” s are included in “◯”) and displayed.

  Further, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 2, as shown in FIG. 73 (E3), a suggestion effect (second effect mode) in which a white arrow passes without sticking to any hold display at the shift timing. Suggestion production (passing pattern)). 73. The suggestion effect shown in FIG. 73 (E3) is performed when it is determined that the suggestion effect (passing pattern) is executed in the second effect mode in the decorative symbol variation start process. Thus, in this embodiment, as the suggestion effect, the effect display device 9 performs display control in which a black arrow (first effect mode) or a white arrow (second effect mode) flies from the right side of the display area. This suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes, and when the arrow is stuck in the hold display (when the suggestion effect (success pattern) is performed), the display mode changes, and the arrow is stabbed in any hold display. If it passes without a suggestion effect (passage pattern), the display mode does not change.

  Thereafter, the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols is stopped (FIG. 74 (F)), and when the fluctuating display based on the hold information corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first hold display is erased. The first hold display is shifted. At this time, as the suggestive effect suggesting that the hold display changes, the effect display device 9 performs display control in which a black arrow flies from the right side of the display area (first effect mode) (FIG. 74 (G)). ).

  When the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 2 and the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 74 (H1), at the shift timing, While the first hold display (corresponding to the hold display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 73 (B3)) is performed, an effect (suggested effect (success pattern) of the first effect mode) is performed, The hold display with a black arrow is changed from the special mode to the first special mode (in this example, “X” is included in “◯”) and displayed. Further, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 2 and the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 74 (H2), at the shift timing, While the first hold display (corresponding to the hold display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 73 (B3)) is stabbed by a black arrow (the suggested effect (success pattern) of the second effect mode), The hold display with a black arrow is changed from the special mode to the second special mode (in this example, two “x” s are included in “◯”) and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 72, in this embodiment, in the prefetching effect based on the first prefetching effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the change display (holding information) to be notified is not displayed once in a special mode. The final display mode is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode. At this time, the timing displayed in the final display mode includes an arbitrary shift timing in addition to the start winning timing. As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, in the prefetching effect based on the second prefetching effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the change display (holding information) to be notified is displayed in a special manner at the timing of the start winning prize. The final display mode is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode at an arbitrary shift timing. As described above, in this embodiment, since the hold display can be changed to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed at a plurality of timings, there are various timings for changing the display mode of the hold display. When the hold display is displayed in the special mode, the hold display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the first special mode until the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold display is started. Since the display is changed into two special modes, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 72 to 74, a case is shown in which an effect of a mode in which a black arrow flies from the right side of the display area is executed as the suggestion effect. It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, you may make it perform the production | presentation which used the movable member (community) provided in the gaming machine as a suggestion production. In this case, for example, the suggestion effect may be executed by displaying an image in which a bullet is fired in accordance with the movement of the movable member simulating the shape of the pistol.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the display result and the variation pattern of the variation display at the time of starting winning, which is realized by executing the effect processing at the time of winning. Determination means is provided. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 implements a hold display (total hold storage display) corresponding to the hold storage based on the determination result by the determination means, which is realized by executing a pre-reading effect determination process, a decorative symbol variation start process, or the like. There is an effect executing means for executing a pre-reading effect for displaying the storage in the storage in the first special mode or the second special mode. The effect execution means can display the hold display by changing it to the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings (start winning prize timing, shift timing, etc.). Is displayed, the variable display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode until the variable display based on the hold memory corresponding to the hold display is started. Is configured to do. With such a configuration, it is possible to display the hold display by changing to the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings, and therefore there are various timings for changing the display mode of the hold display. When the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the hold display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed. it can.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the display mode of the hold display, which is realized by executing the pre-reading production determination process, the decorative symbol variation start process, or the like. Suggesting effect execution means for executing the suggesting effect (suggesting effect (success pattern) and suggesting effect (passing pattern)) is provided. The suggestion effect executing means is configured to execute the suggestion effect at a higher frequency when the hold display is displayed in the special mode than when the hold display is not displayed in the special mode. With such a configuration, when the hold display is displayed in a special manner, the suggestion effect is executed at a high frequency, so that a sense of expectation can be increased and the game entertainment can be improved.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, when the determination means determines that the display result is a big hit, the effect execution means stores the reserved memory that is the determination target at a higher rate than when it is determined that the big hit does not occur. The corresponding hold display is displayed in the second special mode. Further, the effect execution means does not display the hold display in the special mode when performing the pre-read effect in the second prefetch effect pattern that is displayed by changing the hold display from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode. The hold display is configured to be displayed in the second special mode at a higher rate than when the prefetch effect is performed in the first prefetch effect pattern displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode. By being configured in this way, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the ratio displayed in the second special mode with a high degree of expectation to be a big hit is increased, so that the expectation can be enhanced, Amusement interest can be improved.

Embodiment 3 FIG.
Further, in addition to the configuration shown in the first embodiment, in addition to the configuration shown in the first embodiment, the pending storage stored when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state in the high base state is stored. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state in the stored high base state when the start winning prize is given to the second start winning port 14. You may comprise so that a special effect can be performed when the variable display based on the hold memory memorize | stored when being controlled is performed. Hereinafter, a third embodiment in such a configuration will be described.

  Note that in this embodiment, detailed description of portions that perform the same configuration and processing as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and portions that are different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a start port switch passage process in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 75, in this embodiment, in the start port switch passing process, in addition to the process shown in the first embodiment, the CPU 56 transmits a second reserved memory number addition designation command in step S1232. Then, when the gaming state is in the high base state, control is performed to transmit the second start winning designation command at the time of high base to the microcomputer 100 for effect control, and when in the low base state, the second start winning designation command at the time of low base is issued. Control to transmit to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S1233).

  Note that the second start winning designation command at the time of high base is an effect control command indicating that a second start winning has occurred when the gaming state is in the high base state. The low start second start winning designation command is an effect control command indicating that the second start winning is generated when the gaming state is the low base state.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing (step S704) in the third embodiment. In this embodiment, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 executes the processes of steps S661 to S665 in addition to the processes shown in the first embodiment.

  In this embodiment, when the received effect control command is a high base second start winning designation command (step S661), the effect control CPU 101 performs effect execution information in the second start winning command storage area. "0" (indicating that special effects are not to be executed) is set (step S662).

  FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a start winning command storage area (a first starting winning command storage area, a second start winning command storage area) according to the third embodiment. In this embodiment, in the low base state, the variable display of the identification information based on the hold memory stored in the winning game state (the transition is made when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the winning symbol) is performed. Sometimes special effects are performed. As shown in FIG. 77, in this embodiment, a storage area for effect execution information is provided in the start winning command storage area, and information indicating whether or not the special effect should be executed (conditions for executing the special effect) Is stored in the start winning command storage area as “production execution information”.

  When the received effect control command is a low base second start winning designation command (step S663), the effect control CPU 101 sets “1” (special) as effect execution information in the second start winning command storage area. Is set (step S664). In addition, when there is presentation execution information for which “0” is set in the second start winning command storage area, the presentation control CPU 101 changes them to “1” (step S655).

  In this embodiment, basically, the special effect is not executed when the variable display of the identification information based on the hold memory stored during the hit game in the high base state is performed, but the process of step S655 is performed. By being executed, it is stored when a second start prize is generated in the winning game state when the holding memory stored when being controlled in the winning game state in the high base state is stored. The special effect is executed when the variable display of the identification information is performed based on the holding storage (holding storage stored when the hit gaming state is controlled in the high base state).

  It should be noted that the effect control CPU 101 stores the last variable category command in the second start winning command storage area (that is, the area in which the latest received command is stored) in the processing of steps S662 and S664. The production execution information is set.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing decorative symbol variation start processing (step S801) according to the third embodiment. In this embodiment, in the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 executes the processes of steps S8002 to S8004 in addition to the processes shown in the first embodiment.

  In this embodiment, in the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 (step variation of the second special symbol is started) when the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step 2). S8002), it is confirmed whether or not “1” is set as effect execution information in the storage area (storage area 1) corresponding to the change to be started in the second start winning command storage area (step S8003). When “1” is set, the CPU 101 for effect control displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen similar to the background screen corresponding to the high probability / high base state (for example, a red display) Color background screen) (step S8004), and the execution of the special effect (in this example, the background effect) is started.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, in the special gaming state (in this example, the high base state), in the advantageous state (in this example, the winning gaming state (the open state of the variable winning ball device 15)). The special effect is not executed when the variable display based on the hold storage stored when being controlled is performed. Further, in the normal state (in this example, the low base state), when the reserved memory stored when the special gaming state is controlled to the advantageous state is stored and is controlled to the advantageous state When the game ball passes through the start area (in this example, the second start winning opening 14), a variable display based on the stored hold stored when the advantageous state is controlled in the stored special game state is displayed. When it is being performed, a special effect (in this example, a background effect) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the special performance from being executed frequently and the interest in the game from deteriorating.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as boards on which a circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 is not connected to another board (for example, FIG. Or a sound / lamp board having a function of a circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and a function of a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). An effect control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to sound control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the variation time, the type of reach production, the presence or absence of pseudo-continuous (the production in which one or more temporary stoppages and re-variations are performed during one variable display), etc. In order to notify the microcomputer 100 for effect control of the change pattern indicating the change mode, an example in which one change pattern command is transmitted when starting change is shown, but the change pattern is generated with two or more commands. You may make it notify to the microcomputer 100 for control. Specifically, in the case of notifying with two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 is the first command before reaching a reach such as the presence or absence of a pseudo-ream, the presence or absence of a slide effect, etc. A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop is transmitted, and the second command is a so-called “reach” when the reach is reached, such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of a redrawing effect. You may make it transmit the command which shows the variation time after a 2nd stop) and a variation aspect. In that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in variable display (variable display) based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 may notify the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 may select a specific change mode executed at each timing. . When two commands are transmitted, the two commands may be transmitted within the same timer interrupt. After the first command is transmitted, a predetermined period elapses (for example, the next timer A second command may be sent (in interrupt). Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to such an example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern with two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  Further, in this specification, “the ratio is different” is not limited to A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%, but the ratio is different from A: B = 70%: 30%. B = 100%: One with a different ratio due to a relationship such as 0% (that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation) is also included.

  In each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine. However, the present invention is not limited to a plurality of types according to the operation of the operation lever by the player when a medal is inserted and a predetermined bet number is set. When the symbol is rotated according to the stop button operation by the player and the combination of the stop symbol becomes a specific symbol combination, it is applied to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player It is also possible to do.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the game machine uses a game medium as an example. However, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosing game machine that encloses a game medium such as a ball and gives a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied.

  The present invention is applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display device 8b 2nd special symbol display device 9 Production display device 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd starting winning opening 15 Variable winning ball device 20 Special variable winning ball device 31 Game control board ( Main board)
56 CPU
80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
109 VDP
560 Microcomputer for game control

Claims (1)

Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area provided in the game area, a specific display predetermined in the variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable and deriving and displaying the display result A gaming machine that controls a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when a result is derived and displayed,
Variable winning means that can change between an advantageous state in which a game medium easily passes through the starting area and a disadvantageous state in which it is difficult to pass through,
Effect state control means for controlling to any one of a plurality of effect states including a special effect state corresponding to a special game state advantageous to the player after the end of the specific game state;
Special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect in the same manner as the special effect state when not controlled to the special effect state,
When the special effect is executed by the special effect executing means and controlled to the specific game state, the effect state control means is compared with the case where the special effect is not executed and controlled to the specific game state. And control to the special performance state at a high rate,
The special effect executing means is capable of executing the special effect in variable display of identification information executed based on the fact that the variable winning means is in the advantageous state and the game medium has passed through the starting area. A featured gaming machine.